JP2018023605A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a performance effect during music selection.SOLUTION: A game machine for performing a game such as a pachinko game machine comprises music reproduction means (for example, a performance control CPU for executing a step S634) capable of reproducing a music in a specific period (for example, a period in a jackpot game state). The game machine can select a music which is reproduced in the specific period from plural kinds of musics. Since the music reproduction means reproduces a part of the selected music and a specific part of the music different from a beginning part of the music (for example, a bridge part) during music selection (for example, executing a step S628), a performance effect during music selection is improved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 17

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Some gaming machines can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can select a music piece according to the player's action and can output the selected music piece in an advantageous state and a state other than the advantageous state.

JP 2014-233406 A

  The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a poor effect when selecting a song.

  This invention is made | formed in view of the said situation, and it aims at providing the game machine which can improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 901),
A plurality of operation units that can be operated by the player (for example, a stick controller 9031A, a push button 9031B, volume control buttons 9042A and 9042B),
An operation process execution means capable of executing an operation process corresponding to the operation of the operation unit (for example, the controller sensor of the stick controller 9031A in the operation effective period when the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is effective. A portion that performs an effect corresponding to the operation based on the reception of a detection signal from the push sensor 9035B of the unit 9035A or the push button 9031B, and the effect control CPU 90120 operates the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B. A portion for executing an operation process in accordance with the operation based on the reception of the detection signal from the button switch unit 9043 in the effective operation valid period).
Music reproduction means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17) capable of reproducing music in a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit gaming state),
The operation unit includes a first operation unit (for example, stick controller 9031A) and a second operation unit (for example, push button 9031B, volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B),
The operation processing execution means includes
When there is an operation in the first operation mode (for example, continuous hitting operation) or an operation in the second operation mode (for example, a long press operation) different from the first operation mode in the first operation unit, The corresponding operation process corresponding to each operation mode is executed (for example, when the stick controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the effect control CPU 90120 performs the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation. A portion for performing an effect of changing the image displayed on the display screen.When the stick controller 9031A is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect over the period of the pressing operation. The part which performs the effect which changes the image currently displayed on the apparatus 905.)
If there is an operation in the third operation mode (for example, continuous operation) in the second operation unit, the corresponding operation process corresponding to the third operation mode is executed (for example, the push button 9031B is continuously pressed). A portion that performs an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation when the effect control CPU 90120 is operated a plurality of times (continuous operation). When there is an operation of a fourth operation mode (for example, a long press operation) that is different from the operation mode, a non-corresponding operation process that does not correspond to the fourth operation mode is executed (for example, executed during the automatic repeated hitting effective period) When an operation promotion effect for prompting a continuous hitting operation is executed in a preview effect or the like, if the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control CP 90120 is part executes an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the push button 9031B are continuously multiple times operations (successive depression operation).),
The music reproduced in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C),
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the currently selected music and is different from the head of the music at the time of music selection (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). Such).
According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
At the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the music reproduced in the specific period, and displaying the image corresponding to the specific part (for example, the music corresponding image in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. 19B) May be provided.
According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
Storage means for storing one piece of music as a plurality of divided audio data including specific part data indicating the sound of the specific part (for example, a plurality of voices including chorus data as shown in FIG. 19A) ROM 121 for storing data)
The music reproduction means reproduces the specific part of one music based on the specific part data when the music is selected (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). During the specific period, the music data divided into a plurality of pieces may be connected to reproduce one piece of music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17).
According to such a configuration, the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

(4) Any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3)
A gaming machine capable of effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) relating to a game in accordance with a player's operation (for example, operation of the stick controller 31A, player's predetermined operation, etc.)
When adjusting the effect, the adjustment status of the effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment status, brightness adjustment status, mode switching status, etc.) can be displayed.
In the first state (for example, in a pachinko game machine, a game state other than the super reach effect, or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, in the slot machine, a game state other than a continuous effect or a customer In the waiting state and the like, such as a state where no error is being displayed), the adjustment status is displayed so as to be visible regardless of the player's action (for example, the volume adjustment status is displayed in accordance with the execution of processing such as step S162 by the effect control CPU 120) Displayed on the display device 5),
A game that is different from the first state and executes a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect for a pachinko machine, a continuous effect for a slot machine, etc.) (for example, a game in a super reach effect for a pachinko machine) In a state, a gaming state during a continuous production in a slot machine, or the like, the adjustment status is difficult to view or cannot be visually recognized (for example, the volume adjustment status is displayed on the image display device 5 according to the execution of processing such as step S614 by the performance control CPU 120) The adjustment status can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's action (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A, etc., according to the execution of processing such as step S348 by the effect control CPU 120). The volume adjustment status is not displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period. ) It may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing the decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and to improve the game entertainment.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
Notification effect execution means for executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, an obtained number notification effect, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect, a cumulative winning number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect, a continuous change count notification, a jackpot song name notification) , Right-handed notification, error notification, effect control CPU 120 for executing promotion effect during jackpot, etc.)
The notification effect executing means, as the notification effect, a first notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired in the specific period (for example, the number of prize balls for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit) Notification effect, etc.) and a second notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit in consecutive chans) ) And can be executed
The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in the process of step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31). In other words, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not be executed).
According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

  Further, modes for carrying out the invention to be described later include inventions according to the following (A1) to (A9). Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when the player operates the operation unit in the first operation mode (for example, long press) as shown in JP-A-2015-47337, the operation unit is There is known a gaming machine or the like that determines that the operation is performed in a second operation mode (for example, continuous hit) different from the one operation mode, and executes an effect (for example, continuous output) corresponding to the determination content. In such a gaming machine, when a player operates in the first operation mode, a plurality of operation units having a function of executing an operation process corresponding to a second operation mode different from the first operation mode is provided. In the case where it is provided, there is a problem that while convenience is improved, there is a possibility that an operation process unintended by the player may be executed. In view of this point, there is a demand for provision of a gaming machine that can improve convenience while suppressing an erroneous operation by a player.

(A1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901),
A plurality of operation units that can be operated by the player (for example, a stick controller 9031A, a push button 9031B, volume control buttons 9042A and 9042B),
An operation process execution means capable of executing an operation process corresponding to the operation of the operation unit (for example, the controller sensor of the stick controller 9031A in the operation effective period when the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is effective. A portion that performs an effect corresponding to the operation based on the reception of a detection signal from the push sensor 9035B of the unit 9035A or the push button 9031B, and the effect control CPU 90120 operates the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B. A portion for executing an operation process in accordance with the operation based on the reception of the detection signal from the button switch unit 9043 in the effective operation valid period).
With
The operation unit includes a first operation unit (for example, stick controller 9031A) and a second operation unit (for example, push button 9031B, volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B),
The operation processing execution means includes
When there is an operation in the first operation mode (for example, continuous hitting operation) or an operation in the second operation mode (for example, a long press operation) different from the first operation mode in the first operation unit, The corresponding operation process corresponding to each operation mode is executed (for example, when the stick controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the effect control CPU 90120 performs the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation. A portion for performing an effect of changing the image displayed on the display screen.When the stick controller 9031A is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control CPU 90120 displays an effect over the period of the pressing operation. The part which performs the effect which changes the image currently displayed on the apparatus 905.)
If there is an operation in the third operation mode (for example, continuous operation) in the second operation unit, the corresponding operation process corresponding to the third operation mode is executed (for example, the push button 9031B is continuously pressed). A portion that performs an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation when the effect control CPU 90120 is operated a plurality of times (continuous operation). When there is an operation of a fourth operation mode (for example, a long press operation) that is different from the operation mode, a non-corresponding operation process that does not correspond to the fourth operation mode is executed (for example, executed during the automatic repeated hitting effective period) When an operation promotion effect for prompting a continuous hitting operation is executed in a preview effect or the like, if the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control C U90120 is part executes an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the push button 9031B are continuously multiple times operations (successive depression operation).)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the operation unit includes the first operation unit that executes only the corresponding operation process, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience due to the execution of the non-corresponding operation process not intended by the player.
The first operation mode and the third operation mode may be the same operation mode, and the second operation mode and the fourth operation mode may be the same operation mode. The first operation mode and the fourth operation mode may be the same operation mode, and the second operation mode and the third operation mode may be the same operation mode.

(A2) In the gaming machine (A1) above,
The non-corresponding operation process is an operation process of a continuous hitting mode (for example, when an operation promotion effect that prompts a continuous hitting operation is executed in a notice effect executed during an automatic continuous hitting effective period, the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period. When (long press operation) is performed, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the image displayed on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation). Part to execute.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to deal with a player who is not good at continuous hitting operation.

(A3) In the gaming machine of (A2) above,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived and displayed as a display result (For example, a pachinko machine 901)
Operation effect execution means (for example, for effect control) that is capable of executing a first effect and a second effect that is controlled in the advantageous state higher than the first effect. When the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command, the CPU 90120 determines the execution of the second auto-strike effect at a higher rate than when the deviation variation pattern designation command is received. , Execute the determined auto-striking effect)
The speed of continuous hitting executed by the operation processing execution means as the non-corresponding operation processing differs between the first effect and the second effect (for example, in the first auto-striking effect, the image of the character A that is punched out is the first An image is displayed on the effect display device 905 every one period (for example, L1 = about 0.8 seconds). In the second automatic repeated effect, an image in which the character A is punched is displayed in the second period (for example, L2 = about 0.5). Part displayed on the effect display device 905 every second)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is suggested whether or not it is easy to be in an advantageous state depending on the speed of repeated hits, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(A4) In the gaming machine of (A2) or (A3) above,
The operation processing execution means includes
Production can be performed as an operation process corresponding to the operation of the operation unit,
When the second operation unit is repeatedly operated at a speed faster than the continuous hitting speed executed as the non-corresponding operation process, an effect corresponding to the repeated hitting operation is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 accelerates the hitting operation) After the production, the auto button is pressed when the push button 9031B is operated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until a predetermined determination period (for example, about 2 seconds) elapses after the operation effective period is started. In the case where the repeated hitting effect is executed, when a single hit operation of the push button 9031B is performed a predetermined number of times three times in a predetermined determination period (for example, about 2 seconds), punching is performed with the second automatic repeated hitting effect. Single stroke operation every third period (for example, L3 = less than about 0.5 seconds) shorter than the second period (for example, L2 = about 0.5 seconds) which is an interval for displaying images 3 times was made, that is, when it is battered operated at high speed, parts. Modification to run without performing automatic repeated pressing effect, a repeated pressing effect corresponding to the speed of the player's repeated pressing operation)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, an effect corresponding to the speed of the player's continuous hitting operation is executed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

(A5) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A4),
The player can recognize that the operation processing execution means executes the non-corresponding operation processing in the second operation unit (for example, for the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, “automatic continuous hitting”). Display units 90200A and 90200B on which characters “automatic striking function installed” that can be recognized by the player as an operation unit having “functions” are provided in the vicinity of each operation unit. The part which displays the table image which shows the effective period of the automatic continuous hitting function according to the state of the pachinko game machine 901 about 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume control buttons 9042A and 9042B (refer to the modified example of FIG. 58D)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the player can recognize which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit executes the non-corresponding operation process, it is possible to further prevent the occurrence of inconvenience due to misidentification.

(A6) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A5) above,
The operation process execution means executes the non-corresponding operation process when an operation of the fourth operation mode is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The predetermined condition varies depending on the gaming state (for example, the period during which the effect control CPU 90120 is performing variable display of symbols and the period from when the variable display is stopped until the demonstration effect is started (for example, , Ta1 to ta2) enable the automatic continuous hitting function of the push button 9031B and disable the automatic continuous hitting function of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B and the stick controller 9031A, while providing a demonstration performance period and a big hit game period (for example, ta2 to ta2). (In ta3), the automatic repeat function of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is enabled, and the automatic repeat function of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A is disabled.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the situation in which the non-corresponding operation process that does not correspond to the fourth operation mode can be changed according to the gaming state.

(A7) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A6),
When the non-corresponding operation process is executed by the operation process executing means, the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 90120 for executing the effect) executes a specific effect at a different rate from the case where the corresponding operation process is executed. When the push button 9031B is pressed for a long time in the repeated hitting effect, an automatic repeated hitting effect is displayed in which an image of the character punching out is displayed on the effect display device 905. When the push button 9031B is operated repeatedly in the repeated hitting effect, the effect display is displayed. The apparatus 905 is provided with a portion for executing a continuous striking effect for displaying only an image for punching without displaying a character.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve game entertainment.
Note that the “difference ratio” in the above includes 0% and 100%, and the specific effect is executed only when the non-corresponding operation process is executed, even if the specific effect is executed only when the corresponding operation process is executed. May be executed.

(A8) In any of the above gaming machines (A1) to (A7),
When the first operation unit is operated at the same time as the second operation unit is operated in the fourth operation mode, the operation of the fourth operation mode of the second operation unit is validated and the first operation unit is enabled. The operation of the operation unit is invalidated (for example, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the effect control CPU 90120 has started a repetitive operation promotion effect (td1) that promotes a repetitive operation of the push button 9031B at a predetermined timing in the notice effect) The operation of the push button 9031B is enabled for a predetermined period from the time point (td2), and immediately after the push sensor 9035B and the controller sensor unit 9035A receive the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 9035A during this operation effective period. The detection signal of the push sensor 9035B is received, and the push sensor 9035 A detection signal when it receives continuously the long press determination period, the portion to invalidate the operation of the stick controller 9031A.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the player mistakenly operates not only the second operation unit but also the first operation unit, the non-corresponding operation process is executed, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

(A9) In any of the gaming machines (A1) to (A8) above,
The operation processing execution means executes the non-corresponding operation processing even when the second operation unit is not operated when a predetermined automatic processing condition is satisfied (for example, the automatic automatic continuous hitting function is enabled). Sometimes, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, when the operation valid period is started, the automatic continuous striking effect is automatically executed (see the modification in FIG. 58D).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of a loss. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of various commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a volume condition display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music determination process. It is a figure which shows an example of the music which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of the data which can be reproduced | regenerated during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a temporary display process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of no volume change operation in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of volume change operation in a super reach effect. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of the volume condition display in a super reach fluctuation display. It is a figure which shows the example of an execution timing of a volume condition display when there is volume change operation just before the start of super reach production, or just before completion. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect process at the time of attacker opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a probability change confirmation alerting | reporting effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous change frequency alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot music name alerting | reporting operation control process. It is a figure which shows an example of various alerting | reporting images. It is a figure which shows an example of a Z value setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a cumulative prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, a prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, a continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and a jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, prize ball number alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is a figure which shows an example of the alerting | reporting image when the execution period of error alerting | reporting, a probable change confirmation alerting | reporting effect, continuous number of times alerting | reporting, and the jackpot music name alerting | reporting overlaps. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. (A) is a figure which shows the principal part of FIG. 40, (B) is a figure which shows a volume adjustment screen. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the contents of various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are timing charts showing the valid / invalid state of the automatic continuous hitting function. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the production | presentation aspect of an automatic repeated striking effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an automatic repeated hit determination table. (A) and (B) are explanatory drawings showing a repeated hitting operation promotion effect, and (C), (D) and (E) are explanatory views showing an automatic repeated hitting effect. (A) is an example of an effect mode of repeated hitting effects, and (B) is a timing chart showing an effect mode of high-speed 10 consecutive hits. (A) and (B) are explanatory drawings showing repeated hitting operation promotion effects, and (C), (D) and (E) are explanatory views showing repeated hitting effects. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the contents of processing when a push button and a stick controller are operated simultaneously. As a modification, (A) is a state in which the variable display is stopped, (B) is a state in which the demonstration effect is started, (C) is a state in which the menu display is selected in the demonstration effect, and (D) is a menu display screen. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display screen in the state as which automatic description function description was selected by.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each have a number indicating "0" to "9", a symbol indicating "-", or a lighting pattern of each segment not limited to a number or symbol. Various types of special symbols composed of etc. are variably displayed. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  A plurality of types of special symbols that are variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B only need to have a symbol number for identifying each of them. As an example, “0” is added as a symbol number to a special symbol indicating a symbol “−”, and “1” to “9” may be added as symbol numbers for a plurality of types of lighting patterns. .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol can be changed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas in the image display device 5. The confirmed decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display unit 5HR, a second hold display unit 5HL, and an active display unit AHA are arranged. The 1st reservation display part 5HR displays the 1st special figure reservation memory number so that identification is possible. The number of first special figure hold memory is the number of variable display hold corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The 2nd reservation display part 5HL displays the 2nd special figure reservation memory number so that specification is possible. The second special figure holding memory number is the variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is such that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. It occurs based on the start winning by doing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done.

  For example, a special game start condition (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A due to the occurrence of the first start prize that the game ball passes (enters) through the first start prize opening. ) Is satisfied, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the first special figure holding storage number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start winning that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening is generated, the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B (second start condition) ) Is established, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established, the second special figure holding memory number is 1. Addition (increment) is made, and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented). If the first special figure reservation storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start winning is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the first start winning is based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed. Further, if the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second start condition is not satisfied, and based on the start winning. The special figure game may be invalid and only the payout of the prize ball may be performed.

  In the first hold display section 5HR, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the first special figure is performed. In the second hold display section 5HL, a hold display corresponding to the hold storage of the special figure game using the second special figure is performed. The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  The first hold display unit 5HR may be configured to perform the first hold display, for example, left-justified. The first hold display section 5HR is provided with four display parts corresponding to the upper limit value “4” of the first special figure hold memory number, and the hold numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the left end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the first special figure increases due to the establishment of the first start condition, if there is no other first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR, the hold on the first hold display part 5HR At the leftmost display portion corresponding to the number “1”, a new first hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented first special figure hold memory number. If there is another first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR, a new first hold display is hidden on the right side of the display part where the other first hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of first hold displays in the first hold display section 5HR, when a special game using the first special figure is started due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first hold display section 5HR While deleting (digesting) the first hold display in the leftmost display part corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the first hold display in the display part corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (left side) of the erased display area.

  The second hold display unit 5HL only needs to be configured so that the second hold display is performed, for example, right-justified. The second reserved storage unit 5HL is provided with four display parts corresponding to “4” which is the upper limit value of the second special figure reserved storage number, and the reserved numbers “1”, “2”, “3” in order from the right end. ”And“ 4 ”. When the number of holds of the special figure game using the second special figure increases due to the establishment of the second start condition, if there is no other second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL, the second hold display part 5HL holds it. At the rightmost display part corresponding to the number “1”, a new second hold display is added as a hold display corresponding to the incremented second special figure hold memory number. If there is another second hold display in the second hold display section 5HL, a new second hold display is hidden on the left side of the display part where the other second hold display is performed. It is added to the part (corresponding to any of the holding numbers “2” to “4”). When there is a plurality of second hold indications in the second hold display portion 5HL, and when the special figure game using the second special view is started due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second hold display portion 5HL While deleting (digesting) the second hold display in the rightmost display portion corresponding to the hold number “1”, each of the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” Move (shift) in the direction (right side) of the erased display area.

  The active display unit AHA displays the same effect image as the hold display or a different effect image corresponding to the variable display being executed. The display in the active display portion AHA is referred to as active display (corresponding display corresponding to variable display). In the active display portion AHA, for example, the first erased (digested) first in the first hold display portion 5HR in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied. An active display corresponding to the hold display is performed. Further, in the active display part AHA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition is established, the active display part AHA is erased (digested) in the second holding storage part 5HL. An active display corresponding to the second hold display is performed. The first hold display, the second hold display, and the active display only need to have colors and patterns in common. For example, the active display is displayed larger than the first hold display and the second hold display. There may be.

  In the display area of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 1, an active display portion AHA is arranged between the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL. On the other hand, the active display unit AHA is not limited to the one arranged between the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, and is arranged at an arbitrary position in the display area of the image display device 5. It only has to be. Further, the arrangement of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL may be replaced with each other.

  A display for displaying the number of reserved special figure memories may be provided together with the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL, or instead of the first hold display section 5HR and the second hold display section 5HL. . In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first hold display unit 5HR and the second hold display unit 5HL, the number of special figure hold memories can be specified at the top of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B for displaying are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning opening, while the expansion when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state such as the open state or the expanded open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and the game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, when the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball into the special prize winning port. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilt operation (operation) with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the lower pan body or the like below the stick controller 31A.

  The member that forms the upper plate is, for example, a push that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation (operation) by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). A button 31B is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize door.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as a section.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control that is provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9, LED for decoration, etc. A lamp driver circuit that performs on / off driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The random number value may be updated by storing numerical data and the CPU 103 updating the stored value regularly or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. Table data to be stored is stored. In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects, such as a random number value for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols and a random value for determining a notice effect, can be counted. Controlled.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. It is configured.

  Various data used for controlling the rendering operation is stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the rendering control board 12 shown in FIG. Specifically, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit. In the effect control flag setting unit, for example, a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. The flag is provided. For example, the production control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 performs control for executing decorative display variable display and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is moved by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normally open state or the closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 5. The finalized decorative symbol that is the winning combination is derived and displayed. As an example, a combination of big hits is confirmed by stopping and displaying the same decorative symbols on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” may be included. When the jackpot type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, as a round game in the big hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state (a big winning opening is in an open state) advantageous to the player. A normal open round in which the upper limit time to be performed is a relatively long time (for example, 29.5 seconds) is executed. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to be in the first state (the big winning opening is open) as a round game in the big hit gaming state is relatively short. A short-term open round is executed, which is time (for example, 0.1 seconds). The big hit gaming state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “surprise”, the upper limit time for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player in the short-term open round (the big winning opening is set by the big winning door). The upper limit of the period for setting the open state) is a second period (for example, 0.1 second) shorter than the first period in the normal open round. It should be noted that the same control as when the normal opening round is executed may be performed except that the opening period of the big prize opening is controlled to be the second period in the short-term opening round. Alternatively, when a short-term open round is executed, the number of round games executed is a second round number (for example, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) that is the number of executions of the normal open round. ). That is, the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is in the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the big winning opening in each round game as compared to the jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is performed. The period to be changed becomes at least one of the second period shorter than the first period and the second round number of round games executed less than the first round number. That's fine.

  When such a short-term opening round is executed, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a prize winning opening. However, due to the opening period of the big winning opening being the second period (for example, 0.1 second), it becomes a big hit gaming state in which practically no balls (prize balls) can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state (second specific gaming state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprise” is the jackpot gaming state (first specified game state) based on the fact that the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. The gaming state is more disadvantageous for the player than the gaming state. Thus, when the big hit gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed based on the fact that the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the game ball is likely to pass through the big winning opening. In the change mode, control is performed to change the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state). On the other hand, when the jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed based on the fact that the jackpot type is “surprising”, the special change is made in the second change mode in which the gaming ball is difficult to pass through the big winning opening. Control is performed to change the variable winning ball apparatus 7 between the first state (open state) and the second state (closed state).

  The first state (open state) and the second state (closed state) of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 described above are the “first state” and “second state” that will be described in the description of the volume state display process (S162) described later. It is different from “state”. The “first state” to be described later is, for example, a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, or a state in which an error is not displayed, such as a waiting state for customers, and the “second state” to be described later is, for example, pachinko. In a gaming machine, it is a gaming state during super reach production.

  After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” (hit probability) is controlled to be a positive change state that is higher than the normal state based on the fact that the predetermined probability change control condition is satisfied. There is. In the probability change state, a predetermined probability change end condition is satisfied, for example, a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or a big hit gaming state is started before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to the short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. In the short-time state, a predetermined short-time end condition is satisfied, for example, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. On the other hand, after the big hit gaming state is ended when the big hit type is “probability change” or “surprise probability”, the gaming state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probable change state and the short time state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening than in the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). By controlling to such a probable change state and a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 5, the decorative symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) is stopped in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time, A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to rocking, scaling, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a display mode of the background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative design, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are different from the previous operation mode that becomes the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is not a big hit combination, it becomes “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that a variable display effect of pseudo continuous variation (hereinafter also referred to as “pseudo continuous”) can be performed during variable display of a decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable symbol display until the first temporary stop for all decorative symbols. What is necessary is just the number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, as an example, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a plurality of pre-set pseudo-respective chances for special combinations are displayed. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a predetermined effect such as an image display as a re-variation effect may be executed in accordance with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change. Note that the re-variation effect is not limited to that by displaying an image on the screen of the image display device 5, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices.

  As an example of a re-variation effect different from the image display, a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area during each variation display (including the initial variation) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect Controls may be made so that the number of which is lit is increased one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled.

  As a further example of the re-change effect different from the image display, an effect model provided inside or outside the game area during each change display (including the initial change) by the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (including the initial change) The movable member may be controlled to operate. At this time, during the period of each variation display (including the initial variation), the operation mode of the production model (movable member) may be controlled to change, or among the plurality of production models (movable member). It may be controlled so that what is operated in changes.

  Control may be performed so that a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. . Further, as a re-variation effect, for example, when a decorative symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance is temporarily stopped and displayed, a sound that becomes a special sound effect may be controlled to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or instead of some or all of these re-variation effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of effect models, display of effect images, sound effects Control may be performed so as to execute a re-variation effect in which some or all of the outputs are combined. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. A game that is advantageous to a player or a possibility that a predetermined game value is given, such as the possibility that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game state is controlled to the big hit game state (expected degree of big hit) when the production mode changes in The possibility of being controlled to the state may be increased.

  For example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is performed once to three times, so that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, and the decorative design It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display has been started 2-4 times in succession. When the number of repeated executions (pseudo-continuous times) of pseudo-continuous fluctuation (re-variation) increases, there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) than when the number of pseudo-continuous times is small. Get higher. Further, the production ratio may be controlled so as to change depending on the number of repeated executions of the pseudo continuous variation (number of pseudo continuous runs). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed twice, and “super reach determination” may be performed when the pseudo continuous variation is performed three times. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  In addition to “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using such variable display operation of decorative symbols include, for example, “slip”, “expansion chance eyes”, “end development opportunity eyes”, “slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “sliding”, “variable” of “left”, “middle”, “right” from the start of variable display of the decorative symbol to the display of the definite decorative symbol that is the variable display result is displayed. After changing the decorative symbols in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a single or a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) are displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols, a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L) of the temporarily stopped display of decorative symbols are displayed. And / or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), the decorative symbol is changed again, and then the stop symbol is displayed. Thus, an effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped is performed.

  In the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, the decoration of “Left”, “Middle”, and “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern that results in the variable display. In all of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is set as the reach state. Reach production begins. On the other hand, in the variable display effect of “end of development opportunity”, after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols of the lost combinations (special combinations) that are the pseudo-continuous chances in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, Unlike the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect that changes the decorative symbols again in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols change again in some of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The effect operation as the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbols after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) prior to the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display to be noticed is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display to be noticed is started is referred to as a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, a variable notice, or a variable indication notice effect). Is done.

  As an example of the pre-reading notice effect, the display part of the first hold display in the first hold display part 5HR and the display part of the second hold display in the second hold display part 5HL are different from the display form in the normal time. By changing to, a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” for notifying the possibility of “big hit” in the variable display to be noticed may be executed. More specifically, a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, blue, etc.) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) in a normal time is used as a display color in a display part that displays the number of special figure reservations to be specified. By so doing, it is only necessary to be able to notify that the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” is higher than usual. In addition, the display pattern in the first hold display and the second hold display is set to a specific pattern (for example, cherry blossom pattern) different from the normal time, so that the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” is higher than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by displaying a predetermined message (for example, “secret”) as the first hold display or the second hold display, it is notified that the possibility that the display color is changed to a specific color is higher than usual ( Suggest) Such a hold display that suggests that the display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of “hold display change” is also called a hold display change effect.

  Further, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image on the active display unit AHA can be changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the normal time, so that it is possible to become a “big hit” in the variable display satisfying the start condition. A notice effect of “change in active display” for notifying the sex or the like may be executed. More specifically, the display color in the active display unit AHA is set to a specific color (for example, any one of red, green, and blue) that is different from a predetermined color (for example, white) at the normal time. What is necessary is just to be able to alert | report that possibility of becoming a "hit" is higher than usual. The notice effect of “active display change” is also referred to as an active display change effect.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch processing is processing for determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

  As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern, The random number value MR5 for determining the figure display result may be included. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit gaming state. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a random value used for The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. The random value MR5 for determining the usual figure display result indicates that the second start winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state (normally open) with the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary figure game as “per figure”. It is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control to an open state (expanded open state) where game balls are likely to pass (enter) more frequently than (state).

  In the special symbol process included in the game control timer interrupt processing, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and displayed on the special symbol display device 4 Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of operations and opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 to variably display the normal symbol, set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the like. It is a process that enables. In the normal symbol process, as the high opening control accompanying the short-time control, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses a normal symbol change time (normal symbol variation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state. Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is “per normal” than in the normal state, the normal variable winning ball device based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal” Part or all of the control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the movable blade piece in 6B longer than that in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state are performed.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 12 among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). After executing the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes of steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102. And execute.

  FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S101 of FIG. 3 as the start winning determination process. When the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first, based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S204; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 reads the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), thereby It is sufficient if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S206, the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Further, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase (increment). Thus, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by 1. When the second start condition is satisfied, the second special figure hold memory number is updated to increase by one. . At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210).

  In the process of step S210, for example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is held. Data is set in the second special figure holding storage unit. The first special figure holding storage unit is a special game (not yet started), although the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning is generated. The special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored as a hold memory. The second special figure holding storage unit is a special game that has not yet started, although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. (Special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored as a hold memory.

  The first special figure hold storage unit is associated with the hold number in the order of winning (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, for example, based on the establishment of the first start condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach.

  For example, the second special figure holding storage unit is associated with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, etc. as the hold data and storing them. The number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Based on whether or not it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state, whether the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit” is a plurality of types, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, It is the stored storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not to reach the reach of super reach.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, setting for transmitting a start opening prize designation command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S211). Subsequently, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S212). Then, the setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S213). Further, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S214; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S215), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S214; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S216). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect an effective winning of a game ball at the same time, it is possible to reliably complete the processing based on the detection of both effective starting winnings.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S212 of FIG. 4 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is set to “big hit” in the special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 3, FIG. 8) described later. Determination of whether or not to perform control, determination of variation pattern, and the like are performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 performs the winning random number value determination process in step S212 at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first start winning opening or second start winning opening). By executing this, it is determined whether or not the random symbol value MR1 is determined to derive the jackpot symbol as the special symbol display result, and the random value MR3 is determined to be a variation pattern in which the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state. It is determined whether or not. As a result, whether or not the special symbol display result becomes “big hit” before the variable symbol special symbol display or decorative symbol display based on the detection of the game ball that has passed (entered) the start prize opening is started. Whether to reach a reach state during variable display of symbols, and based on this prediction result, whether or not to execute a notice effect as a pre-read effect by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side or not Can be determined.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 5, the CPU 103 first checks the state of a time-short flag or a probability change flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102, for example. The current gaming state in the machine 1 is specified (step S401). More specifically, when the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state is a probability change state, when the probability change flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is ON, the game state is a time reduction state, and both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are both What is necessary is just to specify that it is a normal state when it is OFF, respectively. Further, by checking the value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag control unit) of the RAM 102, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state. It only needs to be identified.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state identified in this way is a big hit in which the big hit gaming state is set (step S402). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is not being made, it is further determined whether or not the high base in which the high opening control associated with the time reduction control is being performed in the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that it is a big hit (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that it is in a high base (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the vehicle is not in high base (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), FIG. The variable display contents are determined using the random number extracted in the process of step S209 shown in (step S405). In this embodiment, the variable display contents to be determined at the time of starting winning are “big hit”, “super reach determination at the time of loss”, “reach determination at the time of loss”, and “general at the time of loss”.

  The CPU 101 sets a big hit determination range in order to determine whether or not the variable display content is “big hit”. For example, from a specific display result determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, data used for determining a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state (special figure display result determination table data) ) Is selected. In this special figure display result determination table data, the range of the determined value assigned with the special figure display result “big hit” may be set as the big hit determination range. This jackpot determination range is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in the process of step S209. At this time, if the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range, the variable display content is determined as “big hit”.

  Corresponding to the fact that the random display value MR1 is outside the range of the big hit determination range, and it is determined that the variable display content is not “big hit”, the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing is set. Regardless of the number of special figure hold memories, the super reach determination range and reach determination range at the time of losing can be determined as a random pattern that can be determined as a variation pattern with reach production including super reach or normal reach (disturbance for determining variation pattern). The range of the numerical value MR3) may be determined in advance.

  When variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a random pattern MR3 for determining a variation pattern and a variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance are prepared. Of the plurality of variation patterns, the variation pattern used in the current variable display is determined. In the variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination is assigned to one of a plurality of variation patterns. The CPU 103 determines the variation pattern to which the determined value matching the random value MR3 is assigned as the variation pattern used in the current variable display. For example, in the variation pattern determination table used at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”, as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) and FIG. It differs depending on the number of figure hold memory and the number of second special figure hold memory. However, some of the determined values are assigned to the same (or the same type) variation pattern regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number. The range of decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach among the decision values assigned to the variation pattern with super reach in the table data constituting such a variation pattern determination table. However, what is necessary is just to be predetermined as a super reach fixed range. In addition, in the table data constituting the variation pattern determination table, among the determined values allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect including the normal reach, it is allocated to the variation pattern with the reach effect regardless of the number of special figure holding memories. The determined value range may be determined in advance as the reach determination range.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of determination of the variation pattern at the time of losing when the variable display result is “lost”. When the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state without time-saving control, a variation pattern determination table in which determined values are assigned to the variation patterns as shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is used. In this case, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the first special figure reserved memory number. . On the other hand, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, it is uncertain whether super-reach is involved or not according to the first special figure reserved memory number. It is determined that the change pattern is determined to have a reach effect including a normal reach regardless of at least the first special figure reserved memory number.

  In addition, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability change state with time reduction control or a time reduction state, a change pattern determination table in which determination values as shown in FIG. 11 (B2) are assigned to the change patterns is used. It is done. In this case, if the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved storage number. . On the other hand, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, it is determined that the variation pattern with normal reach is determined regardless of the second special figure reserved memory number. .

  The special figure hold memory number (the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number) when the start winning occurs coincides with the special figure hold memory number when the variable display is actually started. Not limited to this, there may be a change due to execution of variable display or generation of a new start prize after the start prize has been generated. For this reason, the table data selected due to the difference in the number of reserved special figure storage may not match between the determination result at the time of starting winning and the determination of the changing pattern at the start of variable display. It is generally difficult to predict whether or not to be determined. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment, when the variable display result is `` lost '', at least the determination value assigned to the variation pattern with super reach or the variation pattern with reach effect including normal reach is A common decision value is included regardless of the number of special figure holds. Therefore, whether or not it is determined that the variation pattern with super reach is determined regardless of the number of special figure holding memories at the time of starting winning or variable display start in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the reach effect including the normal reach It can be determined whether or not it is determined to be determined to be a variation pattern involving.

  When the variable display result is “losing” in the normal time when the time reduction control is not performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content If the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “271” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at lose”. judge. If the variable display result is “losing” during the time reduction in which the time reduction control is being performed, if the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “295” to “300”, the variable display content Is determined to be “super reach determination at the time of loss”, and if the random number knowledge MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the range of “289” to “300”, the variable display content is “reach determination at the time of loss” judge.

  When it is determined in step S404 shown in FIG. 5 that the start port buffer value is “1” instead of “2” (step S404; No), a setting for restricting determination at the time of winning in the process of step S405 is performed. This is performed (step S406). Thus, when the high opening control accompanying the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit gaming state, it is based on the occurrence of the starting winning (first starting winning) due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first starting winning opening. Restrict the variable display contents from being judged. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start is performed during the high opening control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the pre-reading notice based on winning a prize from being executed.

  After that, the notification contents at the time of starting winning according to the determination result by the process of step S405 and the setting by the process of step S406 are set (step S407). In accordance with such notification contents, a setting for transmitting a winning determination result command prepared in advance to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S408), and the winning random number determination processing is terminated.

  FIG. 7A shows a start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command and second starting opening winning designation command), a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command and second reserved memory number notification). Command), a determination example of a winning determination result command. In this embodiment, a command B100H serving as a first start opening winning designation command and a command B200H serving as a second starting opening winning designation command are prepared in advance as start opening winning designation commands. Note that the subscript H indicates a hexadecimal number. In addition, as a reserved memory count notification command, a command C1XXH serving as a first reserved memory count notification command and a command C2XXH serving as a second reserved memory count notification command are prepared in advance. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the reserved memory count notification command, different EXT data (for example, any one of 00H to 04H) is set according to the special figure reserved memory count. Further, a command C4XXH serving as a winning determination result command is prepared in advance.

  When a game ball that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) occurs, the steps shown in FIG. When it is determined in the process of S202 that the first special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the first start condition is established. The first start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the first start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “1” in the process of step S203 shown in FIG. A first start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  FIG. 4 shows a case where a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) is generated. If it is determined in step S205 that the second special figure reservation storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the second start condition is satisfied. The second start condition is a condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition is satisfied, the start port buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S206 shown in FIG. 4 and then the transmission setting is performed by the process of step S211. A second start opening winning designation command is transmitted to 12. In addition, a winning determination result command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing transmission setting by the process of step S408 shown in FIG. Further, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by performing the transmission setting by the process of step S213 shown in FIG. Is done.

  On the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to detect the establishment of the first start condition by receiving the first start opening prize designation command, and to detect the establishment of the second start condition by receiving the second start opening prize designation command. it can. Thus, the first start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the first start condition. The second start opening winning designation command is an effect control command for notifying the establishment of the second start condition. The determination result command at the time of winning is when the first starting prize is detected when the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting prize opening or when the gaming ball has passed (entered) through the second start prize opening. At the time of the second start winning, the comparison result (the determination result at the time of winning) using the game random number extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like (the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result) is sent to the effect control board 12 side. To notify. The first reserved memory count notification command notifies the first special figure reserved memory count. The second reserved memory count notification command notifies the second special figure reserved memory count. In this embodiment, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the game ball passes (enters) either through the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Notifying whether it occurred, it is transmitted as hold notification information for designating which of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number has increased.

  The first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command correspond to the case where the execution of the special game is started when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. May be transmitted. Alternatively, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number addition designation command (the second reserved figure number designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted. Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, or together with the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, the total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number May be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  FIG. 7B exemplifies the contents of notification by a winning determination result command. Of the winning determination result commands shown in FIG. 7B, the command C402H, the command C203H, and the command C404H may be transmitted when the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is not within the jackpot determination range. The winning determination result is notified that the variable display result is determined to be “losing” and is not controlled to the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, the command C401H is transmitted when the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is within the jackpot determination range, and when the winning is determined that the variable display result is determined to be “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The determination result (variable display content is “big hit”) is notified. The command C402H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the super-reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content) that the variation pattern with super-reach is determined at the time of losing Will notify you of “Super reach when lost”. The command C403H is transmitted when the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is within the reach determination range at the time of losing, and the winning determination result (variable display content is determined to be a variation pattern with a reach effect at the time of losing. “Reach when lost”). The command C404H is transmitted when the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is not within the super reach determination range or reach determination range at the time of losing, and when winning a prize that there is a possibility that the variation pattern with reach effect may not be determined Notification of the determination result (variable display content is “general when lost”). In this way, the winning determination result command uses the game random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or whether it is determined to a specific variation pattern. Is transmitted as determination result information for notifying the determination result at the time of winning.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 shown in FIG. 3 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as one of a plurality of types. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) One of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Accordingly, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the deriving of the definite special symbol resulting in the variable display result is determined. The variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to “reach” by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is “lost” in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for performing a setting for varying the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4, a process for measuring an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary, and the like. . When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. This special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to stop the change of the special symbol and to stop and display the confirmed special symbol that is the variable symbol display result. Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is turned on. When the big hit flag is ON, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result being “big hit” is set, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The pre-opening process for the big hit is based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”, etc., and the process for starting the execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state and setting the winning prize opening to the open state, etc. It is included. When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". The big hit opening process includes a process for measuring an elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, a number of game balls detected by the measured elapsed time and the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, it is determined whether or not the number of round games executed with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, “2” or “15” depending on the type of jackpot). And a process of waiting until the next round game is started when the upper limit number has not been reached. When the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses, processing that performs various settings for controlling to the probability variation state and the time-short state corresponding to success or failure of the probability variation control condition, and the like are included. Then, when the setting for controlling to the probability change state or the time reduction state is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 3 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), it is stored in the head area (storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) of the second special figure reservation storage unit. Numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read out as the reserved data that has been stored (step S232). Thereby, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 4 are read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the second special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first reserved storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls have passed (entered) the start winning opening regardless of whether the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, A start area data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the start prize opening or the second start prize opening is associated with the hold number or separately from the hold data, and is associated with the hold number in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 And the order in which the start conditions are established can be specified for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure reservation storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the special symbol variable display result, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is the determination result as to whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As long as it is assigned. The CPU 103 may determine the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read from the variation random number buffer.

  In the process of step S239, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state and the probability variation control is performed, the special figure is displayed at a higher rate than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. The display result is determined as “big hit”. The probability variation state is started when the probability variation flag is set to the ON state corresponding to the case where the big hit type is “probability variation” or “surprise probability” by the big hit end processing in step S117 shown in FIG. 3, for example. Is done. When the probability variation state is in effect, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit gaming state than when the probability variation control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state.

  CPU103 determines whether the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). . Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the variation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value for determining the big jackpot type includes a plurality of jackpot types. It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of either type. The CPU 103 may determine the jackpot type by referring to the jackpot type determination table based on the numerical data indicating the jackpot type determination random value MR2 read from the variation random number buffer.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 may store the jackpot type by storing data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control buffer setting unit).

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” in step S240 (step S240; No), or after executing the process of step S243, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined. (Step S244). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of types of big hit symbols is determined according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242. Can be determined as a confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S244, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S245), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S246), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 3 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off (step S261; No), a variation pattern corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263).

  In the process of step S262, for example, a big hit fluctuation pattern is determined using a big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” by referring to the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern reading read from the random number buffer for fluctuation. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern. In the process of step S263, for example, a variation pattern at the time of the loss is determined using a loss variation pattern determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. In the loss variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the variation pattern. The CPU 103 corresponds to the case where the variable display result is “lost” by referring to the loss variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern random number MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. What is necessary is just to determine a fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 10 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “lost”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not reach the reach state, and the reach state is reached. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to each of the cases of “reach” and the case of the variable display result (special drawing display result) being “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed.

  FIG. 11 shows an example of determining a big hit variation pattern or a loss variation pattern. In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 9, for example, a variation pattern at the time of big hit is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 and the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are determined as the usage patterns at the ratio shown in FIG. In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. Further, in the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 9, when the time reduction control is being performed, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined at a rate as shown in FIG. 11 (B2), for example. In the process of step S263, by determining the variation pattern at the time of losing, it is determined whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. It should be noted that whether or not to reach the reach state may be determined when the variable display result is “lost” by a process separate from the determination of the variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, the determined values assigned to the variation patterns accompanied by the reach effect in the super reach such as the variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-3 are the reach in the normal reach such as the variation pattern PA3-1. It is set so as to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern accompanied by the effect. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIG. 11B1 and FIG. 11B2, the determined values assigned to the variation pattern with reach effect in normal reach, such as the variation pattern PA2-1, are the variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2. It is set to be larger than the determined value assigned to the variation pattern with the reach effect in the super reach such as -3. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect in the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” (expected degree of big hit) is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 11 (B1), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the first special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. As a specific example, the determined value in the range of “159” to “180” is assigned to the variation pattern PA1-1 if the first special figure reserved memory number is 0, and the first special figure reserved memory number is 1. If it is, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-2, and if the first special figure reservation storage number is 2 or more, it is assigned to the fluctuation pattern PA1-3. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of first special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the first special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the first special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that In normal times when the time reduction control is not performed, it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) the second start winning opening, and the frequency of executing the special game using the second special figure is low. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the first special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the second special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, refer to the table data corresponding to the first special figure holding memory number at that time. The variation pattern may be determined. Alternatively, corresponding to the fact that the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, regardless of the second special figure holding memory number, FIG. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value B1). Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, the “first special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B1) is replaced with the “second special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the second special figure reserved storage number.

  In the example of determination shown in FIG. 11 (B2), a determination value assigned to a different variation pattern is included depending on whether the second special figure reservation storage number is 0, 1 or 2 or more. With such a setting, the average variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols can be varied according to the number of second special symbol reservations stored. In particular, when the second special figure reserved memory number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, “2”), the average variable display time is shortened compared to when the second special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined value. It is sufficient that a determination value is assigned to each variation pattern so that During the time-saving control, the game ball easily passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, and the special game using the second special figure is frequently executed. When the special figure game using the second special figure is executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure, the special figure game using the second special figure is repeated if the time is short. The possibility of being executed is high, and the frequency of executing the special figure game using the first special figure is low. When the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is zero. Therefore, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the second special figure reservation memory number is a predetermined value (for example, “0”) regardless of the first special figure reservation memory number. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the same table data. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to table data that is different from the determination value allocation shown in FIG. 11B2 regardless of the first special figure reservation storage number. Alternatively, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, the “second special figure reserved memory number” shown in FIG. 11 (B2) is read as the “first special figure reserved memory number”. The variation pattern may be determined with reference to the table data corresponding to the first special figure reserved storage number.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S262 and S263, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time is set (step S264). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 10, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. Therefore, the special figure fluctuation time is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern in the processing of steps S262 and S263. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which a special symbol or decorative symbol variable display result is derived by setting the special symbol variation time.

  Following the process of step S264, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S265). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S265 is executed, a command transmission setting at the time of starting the change of the special symbol is performed (step S266). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, the second variation from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first variation start command and the second variation start command use the variation start in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. This is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special figure game. The variation pattern designation command is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative design. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After executing the process of step S266, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S267), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S267, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 3 is executed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main process shown in FIG. 12 is executed. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S 51), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (mounted on the production control board 12. (Register / counter circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S52; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed (step S54). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. In the command analysis process, for example, when there is a reception command stored in the production control command reception buffer, it is determined which production control command has been received by confirming the MODE data of the reception command.

  Subsequent to the command analysis process, an error notification process (step S55) is executed. In the error notification process, for example, an error image for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is displayed on the image display device 5 under control of the effect control CPU 120, or a sound for notifying the occurrence of an abnormality is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Or output.

  Following the error notification process, an effect control process is executed (step S56). In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Following the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed (step S57), and numerical data indicating the effect random number counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is used by the software as various random values used for effect control. Update. After execution of the effect random number update process, the process returns to step S52.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S54 of FIG. 12 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc. to determine whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15. Is determined (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is a jackpot start designation command (step S502). ). If the command is a big hit start designation command (step 502; YES), it is updated so as to add 1 to the consecutive-chan count count value K (step S503), and the process returns to step S501. The continuous channel count value K is a value stored in a continuous channel counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value that indicates the continuous channel count. Here, the continuous change means that the variable display result becomes “big hit” when the probability change state or the time saving state is set, and the control is changed to the probability change state or the time reduction state even after the big hit gaming state is finished. That means. In addition, the number of consecutive changes means that the variable display result is “big hit” when the probability change state or the short time state is reached, and it is continuously controlled that the probability change state or the short time state is controlled even after the big hit gaming state ends. Say the number of times.

  If the received command is not a jackpot start designation command in step S502 (step S502; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big prize opening prize designation command (step S504). If it is a big winning opening prize designation command (step S504; YES), the prize ball number count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S505). The winning ball count value is a value stored in a winning ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and may be any value indicating the number of winning balls. Here, the number of winning balls means the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit.

  After executing the process of step S505, the cumulative prize ball count value is updated to be added by 15 (step S506), and the process returns to step S501. The cumulative prize ball count value is a value stored in a cumulative prize ball counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and may be any value indicating the cumulative prize ball number. Here, the cumulative number of winning balls refers to the number of game balls that are paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hits in the chain. In addition, both the number of winning balls and cumulative number of winning balls, including the number of payouts for winning in the first and second starting winning mouths and the general winning mouth, may be the number of game balls paid out as winning balls during the big hit. Good. Further, if it is not a big hit (if the value of the effect process flag is not 3 to 5), it is not necessary to add the prize ball count value and the cumulative prize ball count value.

  If the received command is not a big prize winning designation command in step S504 (step S504; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a big hit end designation command (step S507). If the command is a jackpot end designation command (step S507; YES), the winning ball counter is cleared to initialize the count value to “0” (step S508), and the process returns to step S501.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. Thus, the winning ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the current jackpot gaming state, thereby controlling the jackpot gaming state. Each time, the number of game balls paid out for winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  If the received command is not a jackpot end designation command in step S507 (step S507; NO), it is determined whether or not the received command is a gaming state designation command (step S509). If it is a gaming state designation command (step S509; YES), it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is ended based on the received gaming state designation command (step S510). When the time-shortening control is finished (step S510; YES), the count value is initialized to “0” by clearing the cumulative prize ball number counter (step S511).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening in the continuous game, a winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and 15 game balls are paid out as a winning ball every time it is detected. The accumulated prize ball count value is incremented by 15 and the count value is initialized to “0” in response to the end of the chain, so that The number of game balls paid out in response to winning in the big winning opening during the big hit is counted.

  After executing the process of step S511, the count value is reset to “0” by clearing the continuous number of times counter (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the count value K of consecutive chants is incremented by 1 and the count value K is “ By being initialized to “0”, the number of consecutive chunks is counted.

  If the received command is not a gaming state designation command in step S509 (step S507; NO), after setting according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  In the above, the example of clearing the continuous channel count counter immediately after the time-shortening control is finished (step S512) has been shown, but within a specific period (for example, after returning to the low probability low base state) (for example, If it becomes a big hit again within 20 revolutions), it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the continuous number of times can be taken over.

  In the command analysis process, for example, when (i) a winning determination result command and a first reserved memory number notification command are received together with the first start opening winning designation command, a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting) of the RAM 122 is received. The first start opening prize designation command and the first reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area having the smallest reserved display number as the buffer number among the free areas in the first start prize command buffer provided in the Or (ii) a second start provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 122 or the like when the second reserved memory number notification command is received together with the second start opening winning designation command. Stores the smallest pending display number as the buffer number among the free areas in the command buffer at the time of winning a prize The frequency control is also performed or to store a second start hole winning designation command a second holding memory number notification command in sequence.

  The first start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (first start slot prize designation command and first reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the first start winning is generated, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer according to the receiving order. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first special figure hold memory number.

  The second start prize command buffer is associated with one set of effect control commands (second start opening prize designation command and second reserved memory number notification command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start prize. A storage area is reserved for storage. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control commands received when the second start winning is generated, in accordance with the reception order, corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “4” of the second start winning command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area. The hold display number in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the second special figure hold memory number.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S55 of FIG. 12 as the error notification process. In this error notification process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is an error notification period based on, for example, a notification control pattern (step S141).

  If it is not the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; NO), it is determined whether a magnetic abnormality notification designation command has been received (step S142). At this time, if no magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received (step S142; NO), the error notification processing is terminated.

  If a magnetic abnormality notification designation command is received in step S142 (step S142; YES), after performing operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification processing is terminated. To do. Further, even when it is the error notification period in step S141 (step S141; YES), after performing the operation control for executing error notification in the highest layer (step S143), the error notification process is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S143, in order to execute error notification according to a predetermined notification mode in accordance with notification control execution data read from a notification control pattern prepared in advance for executing error notification, various commands are issued. What is necessary is just to produce and transmit with respect to the display control part 123, the audio | voice control board | substrate 13, the lamp | ramp control board | substrate 14, etc. FIG. Thereby, for example, error notification such as displaying an error notification image as shown in FIG. 34A on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The error notification image shown in FIG. 34A corresponds to the message “Error occurred! And a pictogram image AR1 indicating a pictogram for notifying that an error has occurred. The pictogram image AR1 only needs to be displayed in a predetermined display mode corresponding to the error notification. The error notification image display time (error notification notification period) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  In the present embodiment, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image for probability change confirmation notification effect as a third notification for notifying that a predetermined probability change control condition has been established, and a winning ball during a big hit as a specific period As the first notification for notifying the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the prize ball number notification effect image for the notification of the number of winning balls and the continuous number of times for notification of the consecutive number of times as the fourth notification for notifying the number of consecutive times Other effect images such as the jackpot / medium name music name notification image for the big hit / medium name notification as the fifth notification for notifying the music name being played during the jackpot and the music name being played during the jackpot are arranged in different layers. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 35A, an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a winning ball number notification effect image, and other effect images are superimposed on each image data. The Z value used for drawing is set, and the RAM 122 that provides the work area of the effect control CPU 120 has an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a winning ball number notification effect image, and others. A Z value setting table for setting the Z value of the image data of the effect image is stored. In this Z value setting table, Z values used when drawing an image are registered in association with items of each image data.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, an image having a small Z value is drawn on the near side, and an image having a large Z value is drawn on the far side. That is, an image with a small Z value is drawn so as to overlap an image with a large Z value, and an image with a small Z value is preferentially displayed. That is, it can be visually recognized that an image having a small Z value is on the near side for the player.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the prize ball The Z value of the number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the other effect images such as the continuous change number notification image and the big hit medium song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. In other words, when performing an effect process when the attacker opens, which will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially displays the award ball number notification effect image over the continuous number of times notification image or the jackpot music name notification image, and the prize ball Control is performed such that the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed with priority over the number notification effect image, and the error notification image is displayed with priority over the probability change determination notification effect image.

  Note that the Z value is set to “2” not only for the award ball number notification effect image, but also for the cumulative number of award balls that have been paid out as a winning ball during a big hit during consecutive times as a special period. The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image for the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as the second notification is also set to “2” in the Z value. Furthermore, not only an error notification image, a probability change confirmation notification effect image, a prize ball number notification effect image, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image, a continuous number of times notification image, a jackpot song name notification image, a background image as a background, etc. Z values are also set, and for these background images and the like, a larger Z value is set than the continuous change number notification image and the big hit middle song name notification image.

  Further, the priority of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be subdivided. For example, when it is the first hit (that is, when the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the first hit), when it is a consecutive change (that is, the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed for the second and subsequent changes) The Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different. Further, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be varied depending on the number of consecutive channels. It should be noted that the display mode (design, wording, etc.) of the probability change confirmation notification effect image may be different depending on whether it is the initial hit or the continuous change (and how many continuous changes).

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the number of prize balls is “2000” and the case where the number of prize balls is “2400”. It should be noted that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the prize ball number notification effect image may be varied depending on whether the number of prize balls is “2000” or “2400”.

  Moreover, you may subdivide the priority of a cumulative prize ball number notification effect image. For example, the Z value of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image may be different between the case where the cumulative prize ball number is “5000” and the case where the prize ball number is “10000”. Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the accumulated prize ball notification effect image may be different depending on whether the number of prize balls is “5000” or “10000”.

  Further, the priority of the continuous change count notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the continuous channel number notification image may be made different depending on the continuous channel number notification image. Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the continuous channel number notification image may be varied depending on the number of continuous channels.

  Also, the priority of the jackpot song name notification image may be subdivided. For example, the Z value of the jackpot music name notification image may be varied according to the music (the type of the music, the number of times the music is played today, etc.). Note that the display mode (color, wording, design, etc.) of the jackpot music name notification image may be varied according to the music.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes the volume status display process (step S162) and the jackpot music determination process (step S163), and then performs steps S170 to S170 depending on the value of the effect process flag. One of the processes in step S175 is performed. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Variable display start waiting process (step S170): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” that is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171).

  Variable display start setting process (step S171): Control is performed so as to start the variation of the decorative symbol (effect symbol). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect processing (step S172).

  Effect processing during variable display (step S172): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. When the variation time is over, based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination command) for instructing the stop of all symbols, control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). . The value of the production process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S173).

  Special figure waiting process (step S173): After the variation time is over, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the image display device 5 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process when the attacker is released (step S174).

  Attacker opening effect processing (step S174): Control during a big hit game is performed. For example, when a command for opening a special prize opening or a command for opening a special prize opening is received, display control of the number of rounds in the image display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process (step S175).

  Ending effect processing (step S175): In the image display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170).

  In the effect control process, the hold display setting process may be executed before executing steps S170 to S175. The hold display setting process is performed, for example, when the first start prize or the second start prize is generated and the first hold display on the first hold display section 5HR or the second hold display on the second hold display section 5HL. For example, determination processing, setting processing, etc. for executing a pre-reading notice effect of “pending display change” using stored data of a holding display data storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 121, for example. including.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described next, according to the player's operation (for example, based on the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player), the volume as an example of effect adjustment related to the game Adjustment is possible. That is, the volume from the speakers 8L and 8R can be changed according to the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a volume state display process (step S162). The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, the volume status display processing is performed in a game state other than the super reach effect, or in a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error (first state), whether or not the player operates the stick controller 31A or the like. Regardless of this, it includes a process for displaying the volume status display image VL (see FIGS. 24A, 25A, etc.) indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the display screen of the image display device 5 so as to be visible. It is out.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S162 of FIG. 15 as the volume status display process. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is being performed (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the change is a super reach change pattern and a reach effect period.

  When the super reach effect is not being performed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach performance. Data indicating the ON state or the OFF state of the super reach operation flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  If the super-reach operation flag is not set to ON in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying a volume status display on the image display device 5 is executed (step S603). As a result, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL indicating the current volume output level is displayed on the image display device 5 as the volume status display. For example, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the volume status display image VL has five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side, and the volume corresponding to the current volume in the image display section. The image is displayed in such a manner that it is turned on from the left end (for three in FIG. 24A).

  Specifically, when the sound volume is a predetermined minimum level (the sound volume output is a low sound level that is suppressed more than usual and not the mute level), the image display is such that all five image display sections are turned off. Note that the lowest level may be the mute level. Further, in the case of the first level that is one level higher than the lowest level, the image display is in the form in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one level higher than the first level, the image display is in a state in which two image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of a third level (that is, a normal level) that is one level higher than the second level, the image display is in a state in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one higher than the third level, the image display is in a state in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display is performed in such a manner that all five image display sections are lit. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In this embodiment, the volume state display image VL has a meter-type display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a numerical formula display mode with numbers or numerical values or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is used. It is possible to use various display modes, such as changing from yellow to red in order of the display to indicate that the red color is larger.

  If the super-reach operation flag is set (ON) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for continuing the volume status display (display of the volume status display image VL) on the image display device 5 Is executed (step S604), and the super reach operation flag is reset to an off state (step S605). Steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when a volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 27C described later. Thereby, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

  After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, the presence / absence of a volume change operation is determined (step S606). If there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (step S606; Yes), a display for displaying the changed volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 In addition to executing the control, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting such as controlling the audio control board 13 so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R is executed (step) S607).

  For example, the stick controller 31A can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the lit state of the image display section is increased by one. While being displayed on the image display device 5, the volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the volume state display image VL after the change in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. The sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered by one level.

  After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S608). The non-super-reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 31A when the super-reach effect is not being performed. Data indicating the on state or off state of the operation flag other than the super reach is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the super reach is set to the on state (step S609).

  After executing the process of step S608 or when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to ON in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) may be until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the first operation, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. In this embodiment, the predetermined period after the operation is set, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume state display image VL.

  Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being performed (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S612). When the non-super-reach operation flag is in an off state (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super-reach operation flag is set in an on state (step S613). When the super reach operation flag is in the off state (step S613; No), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S614). Steps S613 and S614 are processing for preventing the volume status display during the super reach effect as a general rule, as shown in FIG. Specifically, in the second state in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, that is, in the game state during the super reach effect, as shown in FIGS. 24 (C) to (H) to be described later unless requested by the player. The volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 (the volume status display image VL is deleted). Thus, the volume status display image VL can be prevented from being displayed during the execution of the super reach effect which is an example of the game effect (the effect including an important notice) that the player particularly wants to show, and the effect of the super reach effect can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off in step S609 (step S609; No), if the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), the super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). ; Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume state display process is terminated.

  Note that according to the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, the volume status display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

  In the effect control process shown in FIG. 15, the effect control CPU 120 executes a jackpot music determination process (step S163) following the volume state display process (step S162).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit mid-music determination process. Here, the jackpot song is a song that can be played during the jackpot game state, and in this embodiment, a plurality of types of songs are prepared. The prepared types of music will be described later.
In the jackpot music determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot is being hit (step S621). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the jackpot is being hit when the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received and the jackpot end designation command has not been received. If the value of the effect process flag is any of 3 to 5, it may be determined that the big hit is being made. When the big hit is being made (step S621; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the big hit is abrupt (step S622). For example, the CPU 12 for effect control determines whether or not the big hit corresponds to suddenly based on a special winning opening designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  When it is not a big hit (step S621; No) or when it is abrupt (step S622; Yes), the big hit middle music determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is being hit (step S621; Yes) and not accurate (step S622; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the song determination flag is on (the jackpot song is determined). It is determined whether or not (step S623). Here, the music determined flag indicates whether or not the jackpot music has been determined, and is set to an on state in step S633, which will be described later, and cleared to an off state in step S636. Data indicating the on / off state of the music determined flag is stored, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit of the RAM 122.

  When the music determination completed flag is off (the music during the big hit is not determined) (step S623; No), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the continuous number of times counter provided in the RAM 122 as described above, and the first hit ( It is determined whether or not the continuous count count value K = 1) (step S624).

  In step S624, when it is the first hit (K = 1) (step S624; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a music-type reach (step S625). . Here, the music-type reach is a reach in which music corresponding to the type of the reach is reproduced during reach production. In this embodiment, as an example, as shown in FIG. 18A, super reach A to C is set as a music system reach. In the music-type reach, as shown in FIG. 18B, the music according to the reach type is reproduced in a predetermined manner during the super reach production. The music playback mode in the music system reach will be described together in the description of the production example described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S625, if it is a music-based reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines a jackpot song according to the reach type (step S626). In this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (A), if the reach type is Super Reach A, the jackpot song is determined as “Song A”, and if it is Super Reach B, the jackpot song is “Music”. B ”, and if it is Super Reach C, the big hit song is decided to be“ Song C ”.

  If it is not the first hit (K = 1) in Step S624 (Step S624; No), or if it is the first hit (Step S624; Yes), but not the music-based reach big hit (Step S625; No), it is for production control. The CPU 120 determines whether or not the first round in which the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is “1” is being executed (step S627). For example, whether or not it is the first round can be determined by confirming which round number command is stored in the special command opening open designated command storage area.

  When the first round is being executed (step S627; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 outputs the specific part of the selected music piece (step S628). Specifically, the production control CPU 120 issues a command to the audio control board 13 to output the specific part of the currently selected music (in this embodiment, a so-called “rust” portion) to the audio control board 13. And the specific part of the selected music is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. That is, in the process of step S628, only the chorus portion of the currently selected jackpot music is played.

Here, as shown in FIG. 18C, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of music that can be selected during the execution of the first round are prepared. Also, as shown in FIG. 18C, the number of music pieces that can be selected during the execution of the first round is set to increase in accordance with the increase in the number of consecutive chunks. Specifically, in this embodiment, three pieces of music (songs A to C) can be selected when 1 ≦ K ≦ 5 (K: the above-mentioned continuous number of times count value), and four when 6 ≦ K ≦ 10. Selectable from music (music A to D), selectable from 5 music (music A to E) if 11 ≦ K ≦ 15, selectable from 6 music (music A to F) if 16 ≦ K Has been.
For example, when K = 2, the number of songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1) increases by one, and when K = 3, the songs that can be selected from the first hit (K = 1). For example, the number of selectable songs may be sequentially increased by the number of consecutive chunks. Also, it is determined by lottery whether or not a new song can be selected each time a big hit is made and whether or not any kind of song can be selected, not according to the prescribed number of consecutive times. Also good. Further, in addition to the super reach A to C shown in FIG. 18A, for example, a super reach D that is executed only during probability change is provided, and when the big hit with the super reach D is reached, It may be configured such that the corresponding music piece D can be selected.

In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 19B, the music selection is performed by displaying an image showing currently selectable music displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 19B is 1 ≦ K ≦ 5). This is done by placing the cursor CU on the corresponding music A to C display example). The music selection operation is performed, for example, when the player tilts the stick controller 31A in the vertical direction. In this case, the image indicating the music name moves in response to the operation, and the music corresponding to the image of the music positioned (instructed) on the cursor CU becomes the currently selected music (FIG. 19 ( B) is an example in which “Song A” is being selected). That is, in step S628, when the instruction object of the cursor CU moves to another music piece, the chorus portion of the moved music piece (the music piece currently designated by the cursor CU) is reproduced.
As shown in FIG. 18C, when music is added as the number of consecutive chunks increases, it is preferable that the initial position of the cursor CU be a position indicating the added music. . By so doing, it is possible to suitably notify the player of newly added music. However, when the same music piece is selected in the big hit of the previous predetermined time (for example, the previous two times), it is preferable to set the initial position of the cursor CU to the position indicating the same music piece. By doing so, it is possible to present music that suits the player's preference, which is user-friendly.

  In addition, it is good also as an aspect to which cursor CU moves according to selection operation with respect to the image which shows a music title. In addition, the method of indicating the currently selected music is not limited to the instruction by the cursor CU, and it is easier to visually recognize the image indicating the selected music than the image indicating the other music (for example, indicating the selected music). For example, a frame image surrounding the image may be displayed in a superimposed manner, or an image indicating the selected song may be shining), or an image indicating a song other than the selected song may be difficult to view or may not be visible. Further, at the time of music selection, the volume level may be increased and the music identification unit may be output. For example, if the current volume level is a normal level (the third level), a specific part is output at the fourth level or the fifth level (maximum level), or the current volume is selected when selecting a song. When the level is the lowest level or the first level, the specific unit may be output at the normal level when the music is selected.

  Further, the “specific part” is a part of the selected music and is different from the head of the music. In this embodiment, so-called “rust” is an example of a music specifying unit. Here, in this embodiment, each piece of music data of the songs A to F as the jackpot music is stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. And the music data which shows one music is comprised from several audio | voice data (for example, WAV, MP3 etc.) including the data for chorus (an example of specific part data) which show the audio | voice of chorus. Specifically, as illustrated for “Song A” in FIG. 19A, data indicating the entire song A includes intro data, A melody data, B melody data, chorus data, It is stored in the ROM 121 in a divided form such as outro data (each as separate audio data). The same applies to each of the songs B to F as other jackpot songs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden of data capacity compared to a configuration in which specific part data is stored in addition to data for one song. In addition, during a predetermined production such as during a reach production or a notice production of a music-type reach, a part of data of one piece of music (for example, data for B melody) is used alone, so that Only a part may be output. In this way, as in this embodiment, it is possible to take advantage of the configuration of storing data indicating one piece of music as divided data.

  As for the chorus data as an example of the specific part data, for each piece of music, for example, a part that is familiar, has an impact, and is assumed to be catchy is selected in advance as “rust”, and the chorus part Audio data may be prepared in advance as chorus data. In addition, for example, the song A is famous for “rust”, but the song C is more famous for “A melody”. In this case, for music C, the specific part is A melody (specific part data is data for A melody), and if music C is being selected in step S628, the A melody part may be reproduced. In addition, the jackpot music may include a so-called head chorus music (a music that starts with chorus). And the specific part may be the head of music (a characteristic intro or head rust). That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music. Further, when the head chorus music is included in the jackpot music, the data used as the music data for the head chorus music may be common when the music is selected and after the music is determined. For example, at the time of selecting a music piece, the chorus data and the part data (for example, A melody) following the chorus are used to play back the chorus and the part following the chorus, and the same data is used after the music is determined. Then, the chorus and the part following the chorus may be connected and played.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a music determination operation has been performed following the process of step S <b> 628 (step S <b> 629). For example, the music determination operation is a pressing operation performed on the push button 31B, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that there is a music determination operation when the push sensor 35B detects the operation of the push button 31B. When there is no music determination operation (step S629; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the closing timing of the special winning opening (step S630). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine that it is the closing timing of the big prize opening when the first round big prize opening closing designation command is received from the main board 11. Then, when there is a music determination operation (step S629; Yes), or when it is the closing timing for closing the winning prize (step S630; No), the currently selected music is determined (step S631). That is, in this embodiment, when the music determination operation is performed before the grand prize opening is closed during execution of the first round, or when the grand prize opening is closed without performing the music determination operation, The selected music is determined to be a big hit music.

  As described above, in this embodiment, at the time of music selection, the specific part of the music being selected is played back, and there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection. For this reason, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S626 or step S631, the effect control CPU 120 stores the music information determined in step S626 or S631 in the RAM 122 (step S632), and sets the music determined flag to the on state (step S633). . In addition, the data which shows ON / OFF of a music determined flag is memorize | stored in the production | presentation control flag setting part of RAM122, for example.

  Returning to step S623, if the production control CPU 120 determines that the music determination completed flag is on (step S623; Yes), the big hit medium music determined in step S626 or S631 is reproduced (step S634). Subsequently, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit end timing (step S635), and if it is a big hit end timing (step S635; Yes), the reproduction of the music started to be played in step S634 is ended. The music determined flag is cleared to an off state (step S636).

  After the execution of the processes of steps S636 and S633, when the determination is NO in steps S621, S627, S630, and S635, or when the determination is YES in step S622, the big hit / medium determination process is terminated.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (A), in the reach other than the music-type reach, the hit-hit song can be selected by the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round (step S628 described above). Yes. In this embodiment, “reach: normal (big hit)” (variation pattern PA3-1) shown in FIG. 10 is prepared as a reach other than the music-type reach. Reach types such as “Reach D” and “Super Reach E” are prepared, and when the big hit is accompanied by the production of Super Reach D or Super Reach E, the selection operation by the player during the execution of the first round May be able to select a song with a big hit. Moreover, in the above example, the example in which the hit song during the first round can be selected is shown, but the song may be selected during other rounds, or the song may be selected across multiple rounds. It may be possible. The period during which the jackpot can be selected is arbitrary.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a description will be given of the music playback mode when the jackpot music is selected and after the jackpot music is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (B), at the time of music selection, a specific part (“rust” as an example) of the music being selected is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (corresponding to step S628). The identification unit is continuously played until the selected music is determined. The length of the specific portion is a period until the currently selected music is determined (corresponding to a period from the start of the first round to the execution of the process of step S631. A period until the music determining operation is performed, Or when it is shorter than the execution period (for example, 29.5 seconds) of a 1st round, a specific part is repeatedly reproduced until the music in selection is determined. In addition, when the length of the specific part is shorter than the period until the selected music is determined, the part following the specific part in the selected music following the reproduction of the specific part (FIG. 19A In the example of), outro) indicated by “outro data” may be reproduced.

  In this embodiment, at the time of music selection, an image corresponding to the music being selected (hereinafter, music-corresponding image) is displayed in the display area VA1 shown in FIG. The music-corresponding image is, for example, a video such as PV (Promotion Video) or MV (Music Video) of the selected music, and when selecting the music, for example, a portion corresponding to the specific part of the video is reproduced in the display area VA1. To do. Note that the moving image as the music-corresponding image does not have to be reproduced from the part corresponding to the specific part of the music. For example, when music is selected, the music may be played from a specific part other than the head, but the moving image may be played from the head. Further, the music-corresponding image may be a still image showing an artist photo or the like instead of a moving image. Also, the music-corresponding image data may be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a form (each as separate image data) divided for each part of the music, like the audio data of the music.

As shown in FIG. 19C, after the music is determined, the audio data divided into a plurality of pieces constituting the music data of the determined music (for example, intro data, A melody data, B melody data, The chorus data and the outro data are connected (that is, each part constituting one musical piece is reproduced in a time series without any interruption), and one musical piece is reproduced from the speakers 8L and 8R. The determined jackpot music playback mode (corresponding to the music playback mode in step S634) is, for example, as described in (a) to (c) below.
(A) After the music is determined during one round, the music is played from the continuation of the specific part that was played at the time of selection, or is played from the beginning of the music.
(B) In the second and subsequent rounds, the music is played from the beginning (for example, the music is played from the top in response to receiving the second winning prize opening opening designation command).
(C) In the case of K = 1 (step S624; Yes) and the music-type reach jackpot (step S625; Yes), the tune corresponding to the reach type is continued from the part that was being played during the super reach production. Play (for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (B), “Intro”, “A melody” and “B melody” of the music corresponding to the reach type are played during the super reach production. Play).
After the music is decided, it is played from the beginning (intro) of the music, and after the music has made a round to the end (outro) of the music in a state where the big hit has not ended yet, the game returns to the intro of the music and makes two rounds. The eyes may be replayed or may be replayed from rust (specific part) instead of the intro.

  Further, after the music is determined, the music corresponding image is displayed in, for example, the display area VA2 shown in FIG. 19C, which is larger than the display area VA1. The example shown in FIG. 19C is an example in which the display area VA2 is configured over the entire image display area of the image display device 5 after the music is determined. After the music is determined, for example, a moving image in which portions corresponding to the music playback portion are sequentially played back may be displayed in the display area VA2. Note that the music corresponding image displayed in the display area VA2 after the music is determined may also be a still image such as an artist photo. Moreover, the music corresponding | compatible image at the time of music selection and after a music determination should just be a thing from which a display mode differs. That is, the display mode may be changed by a method other than changing the position and size of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 where the music-corresponding image is displayed. For example, the positions and sizes of the display area VA1 and the display area VA2 are the same, but in the music-corresponding image after the music is determined, there are no effects at the time of music selection (for example, a fade-in / fade-out effect or a bright lighting effect) Etc.) may be applied.

  Note that the operation means for performing the music selection operation and the determination operation is not limited to the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. The operation means may be, for example, a cross button that can be operated in the vertical and horizontal directions, a dial key that can be rotated, for example, or may be a touch operation or a press operation like a touch panel. . Moreover, any configuration that can detect the operation content according to the operation by the player is acceptable. For example, an arbitrary operation that is not limited to an instruction input action by the player, such as an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic sensor, a CCD sensor, or a CMOS sensor. A sensor capable of detection may be used.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S171 in FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result (step S321). As the process of step S321, the CPU 120 for effect control is based on the variable display contents such as the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. To determine the final stop symbol. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (lack)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, and “probability change (big hit)”. I just need it.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the production control CPU 120 uses the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R to display different (unmatched) decorative symbols as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left determined symbol that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left determined symbol determination table that is stored and prepared in the ROM 121 in advance. By referring to this, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the right determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determining table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121 is referred to. From the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined.

  When the variable display content is “reach”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the same (matching) decorative symbols in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R as the final stop symbols. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random values for determining the left and right determined symbols that are updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and stores the left and right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referencing or the like, among the confirmed decorative symbols, decorative symbols having the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are displayed. decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the medium fixed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the production random counter is extracted, and the medium fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The same (matching) decorative symbol is determined as the final stop symbol. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the image display device 5, etc. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R is determined. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the design symbol to be displayed and the probability variation symbol (for example, a design symbol that represents an odd number) is the final design symbol. In the jackpot promotion promotion, the combination of decorative symbols (non-probable variation jackpot combination) that reminds the user of the big hit but does not recall the probable state in the image display device 5 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state. This is an effect of notifying whether or not the state is surely changed at the end.

  As a specific example, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, a symbol to be a definite decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when the variable display content is “probability change (big hit)” and it is determined not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative design is determined from a plurality of types of probability change designs. On the other hand, when the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, when it is decided to execute the promotion effect during the big hit, the one that becomes the confirmed decorative symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Accordingly, it is only necessary to prevent the promotion effect during the big hit from being executed despite the fact that the probability variation symbols are all derived and displayed as the confirmed decorative symbols, so that the player is not distrusted.

  In the process of step S321, when the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)” or “probable change (big hit)”, whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect is determined. It may be determined. In the redraw lottery effect, once the decorative symbol of the non-probable variable big hit combination consisting of the same normal symbol is displayed during variable display of the decorative symbol, it is once difficult to recognize or impossible to recognize that it is controlled to the probabilistic state, The player can recognize in a recognizable state that the decorative design of the probability variation big hit combination composed of the same probability variation design is stopped and displayed by variably displaying (revariing) the decoration symbol again and controlled. Note that there is a case in which the control of the probability variation state is not notified when the decoration symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the decoration symbol is re-variable in the re-lottery effect. If it is determined in step S321 that the re-lottery effect is to be executed, a combination of decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped before the re-lottery effect is executed may be determined.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in the process of step S321, a change effect setting process (FIG. 21) for performing execution settings such as a hold display change effect determined in the hold display setting process is executed (step S322). . In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit.

  In the change effect setting process shown in FIG. 21, first, the stored content in the hold display data storage unit is updated (step S551). That is, the stored display data storage unit erases the storage data in the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” and also corresponds to the storage areas lower than the hold number “1” (hold numbers “2” to “4”). The storage data in the storage area is shifted up by one entry. At this time, the stored data to be erased from the storage area corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold display data storage unit may be read and stored in the hold display data buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hold display change timing which is the execution timing of the hold display change effect is reached (step S552). In the process of step S552, one or more change effect timing patterns stored in the hold display data storage unit whose storage contents have been updated by the process of step S551 match the hold numbers associated with the respective change effect timing patterns. It is determined whether or not the designation of the hold display change timing to be included is included.

  If it is determined in step S552 that the hold display change timing is reached (step S552; Yes), execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed (step S553). For example, in the process of step S553, the storage content of the hold display change pattern in the hold display data storage unit and the display mode in the current hold display are specified, and whether or not to change the display mode, and the change when changing What is necessary is just to make it the setting for performing the setting of a later display mode, a pending | holding display change common effect, etc. In the process of step S553, the display color change effect execution setting for changing the display color of the active display based on the determination result of the hold display change pattern may be performed among the active display change effects. As the execution setting of the display color change effect, for example, the hold display change pattern shown in the stored data of the hold display data buffer (stored data deleted from the hold display data storage unit in the process of step S551) is specified. A display mode to be displayed after the active display change effect is executed is set.

  Returning to FIG. 20, subsequent to the change effect setting process in step S322, a reach effect setting process, which will be described later, is executed (step S323). In the reach effect setting process, execution setting of reach effect (for example, reach effect in super reach, reach effect in normal reach, etc.) is performed.

  Specifically, in the reach effect setting process, it is determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” that does not enter the reach state. If it is “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is other than “non-reach”, the reach effect setting process is ended after setting the reach effect according to the variation pattern.

  Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S324). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special-figure change effect control patterns) corresponding to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command and uses it as the use pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) corresponding to the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process in step S322 and uses it as a use pattern. May be set. In the display change effect control pattern, a hold display change effect period, which is a determination target in a variable display mid-setting process (FIG. 22) described later, is also set. In addition, it is not limited to what sets a separate production control pattern as an effect control pattern at the time of special figure change, a display change production control pattern, and a reach production control pattern, 1 production control corresponding to the combination of the execution setting of each production A pattern may be set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S324, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 122 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. (Step S325). Then, the setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like on the screen of the image display device 5 is performed (step S326). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (special-figure change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. For example, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5.

  After executing the processing of step S326, in response to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, such as the first hold display in the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display in the second hold display portion 5HL, Settings for updating the hold display and the like are performed (step S327). For example, when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed (started), the display part (the leftmost display part) corresponding to the hold number “1” is deleted in the first hold display unit 5HR. (Digestion) and move (shift) the first hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed (started), the display part (the display part on the right end) corresponding to the holding number “1” is deleted in the second holding display part 5HL. (Digestion) and move (shift) the second hold display in the display parts corresponding to the other hold numbers “2” to “4” one by one in the right direction. Moreover, in the process of step S327, you may perform the setting for updating the active display in the active display part AHA. In this case, for example, when the first hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the first hold display portion 5HR, the same active display as the erased (digested) first hold display is displayed. The active display unit AHA starts. On the other hand, when the second hold display corresponding to the hold number “1” is erased (digested) in the second hold display portion 5HL, an active display similar to the erased (digested) second hold display is actively displayed. Start at part AHA.

  After updating the hold display or the like in the process of step S327, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” that is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S328), and then the variable display start setting process is performed. finish.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 22, first, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S341). As an example, in the process of step S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and an end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, etc. In addition, it may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), it is determined whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (step S342). The hold display change effect period may be determined in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined in the process of step S324 shown in FIG. If it is the hold display change effect period (step S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (step S343). In the process of step S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on, blinked, or turned off. In other words, it is only necessary that the predetermined display device can execute the hold display change effect by combining some or all of them.

  When it is determined in step S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (step S342; No), after executing the process of step S343, the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S346. In addition, when it is not a holding | maintenance display change production period (step S342; No), after execution of step S343, the determination process whether it is an active display change production period similarly to the process of the above-mentioned step S342 and S343, for example. Alternatively, control for executing the active display change effect may be executed.

  In step S346, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect. The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined in step S346 that it is a reach production period (step S346; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is super reach (step S346A). When it is determined that it is super reach (step S346A; Yes), a hold display erasing process is executed to delete the hold display displayed on the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL (step S347). . For example, as shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, the hold display of the second hold display portion 5HL is displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 until the start of the super reach production. As shown in FIG. 24C, when the super reach effect is started by executing the hold display erasing process (that is, when the start timing of the super reach effect is reached), the hold display of the second hold display unit 5HL is erased. (If the hold display of 1st hold display part 5HR is displayed, the hold display will also be erased), and the hold display will be hidden. As described above, since the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect, the predetermined area portion at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 (that is, the display area portions of the first hold display portion 5HR and the second hold display portion 5HL). Also, it is possible to perform image display by super reach production. Further, the player can watch the super reach effect without worrying about the hold display, and can enjoy the effect. Therefore, the reach effect can be fully exhibited.

  The non-display of the hold display is ended by the hold display return control (step S349B) to be described later when the super reach effect ends. That is, the hold display is restored. In this embodiment, the hold display is not displayed during the super reach effect, but may be hidden during the normal reach effect.

  After the process of step S347 is executed, a temporary display process for temporarily displaying the volume status display image VL is executed when there is a request from the player even during the super reach effect (step S347). That is, when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the super reach production, the volume status display image VL (see FIG. 25D) is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). )Is displayed.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S348 of FIG. 22 as the temporary display process. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701). When the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), the presence / absence of a volume changing operation is determined (step S703).

  If there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In this step S704, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A (for example, operated in the left direction or the right direction), the changed volume state display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control to be displayed is executed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is performed such that the audio control board 13 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. (Step S704).

  On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), a volume status display erasure process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the image display device 5 is executed (step S705). The non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off at step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the process of step S704, After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S707).

  If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation start is accepted (step S708). If the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, if the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A, the current sound volume status is displayed on the image display device 5. Display control for displaying the display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 25D, during the super reach effect, the current sound volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the operation of the stick controller 31A. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S710).

  When the super-reach operation flag is ON in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S707). Step S711). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step S712). When there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the controller sensor unit 35A detects that the player has operated the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), the change according to the number of operations of the stick controller 31A in the left-right direction The display control for displaying the subsequent volume status display image VL on the image display device 5 is executed, the changed volume setting value corresponding to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the volume setting after the change is performed such as controlling the sound control board 13 (step S607).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, the lit state of the image display section is increased by one, and the changed volume state display image VL (fourth level) Are displayed on the image display device 5, and the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R is increased by one level. Contrary to the above, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound volume output from the speakers 8L and 8R decreases by one level.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (F), when a predetermined period elapses after the operation, the display of the volume state display image VL is deleted. That is, the volume status display is not displayed. In this way, during the super reach production, if there is a player's operation, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

  After executing the process of step S714, the super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when no operation start is accepted at step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S712 (step S712; No), after the processing of step S713 is executed, or after step S715. After executing the process, the temporary display process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 22, when it is determined in step S346A that it is not super reach (step S346A; No), after executing the process of step S348, control for executing other reach effects is performed ( Step S349).

  When it is determined in step S346 that it is not the reach production period (step S346; No), after executing the process of step S349, whether or not it is the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach production). Is determined (step S349A). When it is determined in step S349A that it is the hold display return timing (step S349A; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes hold display return control for returning the hold display (step S349B). For example, when the hold display return timing (for example, the end timing of the super reach effect) is reached, the hold display is returned as shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S349A that it is not the hold display return timing (step S349A; No), after executing the process of step S349B, for example, in the setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern Based on this, control is performed to execute other effects during variable display, including decorative variable display operations (step S350), and the variable display effect processing is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S351). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S351; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation command normally. You may make it do.

  If a symbol confirmation command is received in step S351 (step S351; Yes), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S352). At this time, a predetermined time is set as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step S353). Further, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S354), and then the effect process during variable display is ended.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, after a game ball driven into the game area passes through (enters) the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, a start winning such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning occurs. Based on the establishment of the start condition that permits the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, the variable symbol special symbol display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The On the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in synchronization with variable display of special symbols.

  When the first start condition is established based on the occurrence of the first start winning due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening, the processing of steps S203 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 is executed. , 1 is added to the number of first special figure hold memory. When the second start condition is established based on the occurrence of the second start prize due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start prize opening, the processes of steps S206 and S207 shown in FIG. 4 are executed. The second special figure holding storage number is incremented by one. At this time, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted by the process of step S209. In step S212, a winning random number determination process as shown in FIG. 5 is executed to determine variable display contents such as whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Is received from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  When variable display of a special game or a decorative symbol is started based on the establishment of the start condition, a plurality of variation patterns are obtained by executing variation pattern setting processing as shown in FIG. 9 in step S111 shown in FIG. And a variation pattern designation command indicating that the determined variation pattern can be specified is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In step S321 shown in FIG. 20, the final stop symbol or the like is determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command, and then the process shown in FIG. 21 is executed as the change effect setting process in step S322. Is done. In the change effect setting process, when it is determined in step S552 that it is the hold display change timing, execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed in step S553.

(Example)
Here, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the example of the effect in a super reach effect is demonstrated.
FIG. 24 shows an effect example in the case of no volume change operation in the super reach variation display. When variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols is started, reach effect setting processing in step S323 shown in FIG. 20 is executed. In the reach production setting process, for example, it is determined that the reach production in the super reach (any of the super reach A to C as the music-type reach) is executed. In this execution example, description will be made from the time when the decorative symbol variable display state reaches the reach state (reach establishment) as shown in FIG. Further, by the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16, a volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG.

  After reaching FIG. 24B, the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 24C is executed. An effect image as shown in FIG. 24C (for example, an image using characters of “super reach”) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the super reach. The player can grasp that the super reach production is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 24C, a variable display of decorative symbols is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative design can be executed by the process of step S350, for example. In addition, the volume state display image VL is deleted from the screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 24C by the volume state display deletion process (step S614) shown in FIG. Moreover, the hold display is deleted as shown in FIG. 24C by the hold display deleting process (step S347) shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, a super reach effect including a battle effect as shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 24 (H), when the battle effect result (in this case, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed, the super reach effect is terminated. For example, the final stop symbol of the reach combination as shown in FIG. Derived and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24I, the volume status display image VL is displayed by the volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16, and the hold status is controlled by the hold display control process (step S349B) shown in FIG. The display is restored. As shown in FIG. 24I, the variable display ends when the final stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative pattern at the time of the fluctuation stop, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative pattern, that is, the game result can be visually confirmed. The volume can be adjusted while not obstructing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 26A, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is not performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. FIG. 26A is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is no volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, in the super reach variation display, the player has not operated the stick controller 31A at all, so the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 35A remains at a low level. The volume status display is displayed on the image display device 5 except during the super reach production.

  Further, during the production of the super reach, as shown in FIG. 18A, music corresponding to the reach type is reproduced. For example, when the super reach notification is executed as shown in FIG. 24C, for example, as shown in FIG. Are played sequentially. Then, for example, a special effect sound effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, several seconds) between the effect shown in FIG. 24E and the effect shown in FIG.

  As the effect by the special effect sound, for example, a so-called SE (Sound Effect) effect such as a sound having an echo effect, a repeat sound, a noise sound, a sound having a fade-in / fade-out may be executed. Moreover, you may silence only for the said predetermined period. In addition to the output of the special effect sound, it is preferable that an effect is applied to the moving image that is reproduced during the production by super reach only for the predetermined period. For example, if the video suddenly stops (becomes a still image), the screen is blacked out, or a noise display (such as an analog TV sandstorm display) is used. Good.

  Then, for example, in response to a predetermined operation from the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B being performed during the execution of the special effect sound, or in response to the elapse of a predetermined period, FIG. The battle effect result shown in (H) is displayed, and together with this display, the sound effect for losing to notify the losing is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 18B, rust is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a continuation of the part of the music that was being played during the super reach performance. In this way, the player's expectation can be enhanced by applying a special effect to the sound and the moving image before the battle effect result (the result of the effect informing whether the game is won or lost) is displayed.

  Note that the control for executing the reach effect with such special effects can be executed in step S349. Further, the period for executing the special effect may be determined in advance for each variation pattern of the music-type reach, for example. In addition, during the production of the music-type reach, the music may not be played from the beginning (intro), but may be played from A melody, B melody, or the like. In addition, when a big hit is made after the production of the music-type reach, it may be reproduced from the continuation of the portion reproduced during the reach production of the music-type reach during the first round. For example, (i) A melody may be played during the reach production, and may be played from the B melody subsequent to the A melody during the first round, or (ii) the halfway through the A melody during the reach production. Then, the music may be played from the continuation of the A melody during the first round.

  Next, a case where a volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows an effect example in the case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display. 25A to 25C are the same as FIGS. 24A to 24C described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The music playback mode during the super reach production is the same as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 25D, when the stick controller 31A is operated during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 31A once in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 25E, the volume state display image VL after the change in which the lighting state of the image display section is increased by one. (Volume status display image VL at the fourth level) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the volume output from the speakers 8L, 8R is increased by one level (becomes the fourth level volume output). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is deleted as shown in FIG.

  Through FIG. 25 (D), as shown in FIG. 25 (H), the battle effect result (in this case, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed, and the super reach effect ends, and for example, as shown in FIG. 25 (I). The final stop symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (I), since the super reach effect is finished, the changed volume state display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25D and 25E, the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than the super reach effect as shown in FIG. Since the display is the same as the display state of the volume state display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state may not be the same. For example, the volume state display image VL in the second state may display [1] a different display from the volume state display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state, or [2] The same display as the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, or [3] the first display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state. You may display in the display location different from the case of a state.

  Here, the execution timing of the volume status display in the case where the volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display shown in FIG. 25 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, during the super reach effect, there is an operation of the stick controller 31A by the player, and this operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A. That is, the controller sensor unit 35 </ b> A detects a detection signal (pulse signal) corresponding to the operation by the player and outputs it to the effect control board 12. In the volume status display, the volume status display image VL is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation by the player during the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the start of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the start of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from 3 seconds before the start to the start). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, the super reach production starts within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of the display of the volume status display image VL. The volume state display image VL is erased halfway at the start timing of the effect. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the start of the super reach effect is extended and displayed by steps S701 to S706 in the temporary display process shown in FIG. (See the extended display shown in FIG. 27A). Thus, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the start of the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is displayed in an extended manner, and the volume status display image VL is displayed halfway at the start timing of the super reach effect. Can be prevented from being erased. In the example shown in FIG. 27A, it is ensured that the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds) after the operation. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27B, the volume state display image VL may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start timing of the super reach effect.

  Next, the execution timing of the volume status display when there is a volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27C is a diagram illustrating an example of the execution timing of the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 27C, the player may operate the stick controller 31A immediately before the end of the super reach effect (for example, within a period from 3 seconds before the end to the end). Also in this case, such an operation is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A, and the display of the volume state display image VL is started. Then, the super reach effect ends within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after the operation, that is, within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) from the start of display of the volume status display image VL. When the predetermined period has elapsed, the volume state display image VL is once erased and then displayed again. In this embodiment, the volume status display image VL displayed immediately before the end of the super reach effect is obtained from the step S601, step S602, step S604, and step S605 in the volume status display process shown in FIG. Is displayed as it is even after the end of (see “continuation of display” shown in FIG. 27C). Thereby, even when the display of the volume status display image VL is started immediately before the end of the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued, and the volume status display image VL is displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation. It is possible to omit a useless process of once erasing and displaying again.

(Regarding the production process when the attacker opens)
From here, the attacker opening effect process (step S174) shown in FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect process when the attacker is released. In the attacker opening effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end designation command has been received (step S181). At this time, if no jackpot end designation command is received (step S181; NO), the first round to the fourth round in which the number of round games executed in the jackpot gaming state is “1” to “4” is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S182).

  If it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are being executed (step S182; YES), the rendering operation that is the promotion effect during the big hit is controlled (step S183). Thus, in this embodiment, during the execution of the first to fourth rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot promotion effect as the sixth notification serving as a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probability variation state is performed. Executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probability variable symbol or the probability variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display is performed. May be notified so that the player can recognize the presence or absence of promotion to be in a certain change state by displaying different effect images.

  When it is determined in step S182 that the first to fourth rounds are not being executed (step S182; NO), after executing the process of step S183, notification that a predetermined probability variation control condition has been established is notified. Effect operation control for executing the certainty change confirmation notifying effect for performing is performed (step S184). The effect control CPU 120 is based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control condition is satisfied. In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a probability change control condition for establishing a probability change state after the big hit game state is satisfied in response to a game ball passing through a specific area of the game board. In this case, a specific area switch is provided in the specific area, and the effect control CPU 120 may determine that the probability variation control condition is satisfied when the specific area switch detects the passage of the game ball.

(Probability change notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S184 of FIG. 28 as the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process. In the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the probability change confirmation notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S801).

  If it is not the probability change confirmation notification effect period in step S801 (step S801; NO), it is determined whether or not a probability change confirmation notification command has been received (step S802). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification command has not been received (step S802; NO), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  If a probability change confirmation notification command is received in step S802 (step S802; YES), or if it is a probability change confirmation notification production period in step S801 (step S801; YES), error notification is being executed. It is determined whether or not (step S803). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S803; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect in the uppermost layer (step S804), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation is performed. The control process ends. For example, in the process of step S804, in order to execute a certain change confirmation notification effect according to a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance to execute the certain change confirmation notification effect. Various commands may be generated and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. As a result, for example, a probability change confirmation notification effect such as that shown in FIG. 34 (B) is displayed on the uppermost layer.

  It should be noted that step S805 (FIG. 29), steps S818 to S820 (FIG. 30), steps S900 to S902 (FIG. 31), steps S465 to S468 (FIG. 32), and steps S475 to S479 (FIG. 33) related to the rendering operation control described later. ), In the same manner as step S804, various commands are generated and the display control unit 123 is executed in order to execute an effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern prepared in advance. And may be transmitted to the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like.

  The probability change confirmation notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (B) includes a character image MM2 for notifying a message “probability change!” In response to a predetermined probability change control condition being satisfied. In addition, the display time of the probability change confirmation notification effect image (execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect) may be, for example, 20 seconds.

  If error notification is being executed in step S803 (step S803; YES), after performing operation control to execute the probability change confirmation notification effect in a layer lower than the layer for which error notification is being executed. (Step S805), the probability change confirmation notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over the probability change confirmation notification effect, such as displaying the probability change confirmation notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  In step S184 of FIG. 28, after executing such a certainty change confirmation notification effect operation control process, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit is executed. Production operation control is performed (step S185).

(Prize ball number notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S185 of FIG. 28 as the prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In the award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is the award ball number notification effect period based on the effect control pattern, for example (step S811).

  If it is not the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; NO), the number of prize balls for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000” It is determined whether or not the effect has been executed (step S812). In the process of step S812, for example, a 2000 arrival flag is set that is set to ON when notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during a big hit has reached “2000”. The determination may be made based on whether or not the 2000 arrival flag is in the ON state.

  As in step S812, in each process of step S814 (FIG. 30), steps S393, and S395 (FIG. 31) described later, for example, the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball reaches “predetermined”. A arrival flag that is set to the on state when the fact is notified is provided, and the determination may be made based on whether or not the arrival flag is in the on state.

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has not been executed (step S812; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2000” or more (step S813). At this time, when the prize ball count value is not “2000” or more (step S813; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S812 has reached “2000” has been executed (step S812; YES), It is determined whether or not a prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814).

  If the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has been executed (step S814; YES), The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in step S814 has reached “2400” has not been executed (step S814; NO), the RAM 122 The prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “2400” or more (step S815). At this time, if the prize ball number count value is not equal to or greater than “2400” (step S815; NO), the prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the prize ball count value is “2000” or more in step S813 (step S813; YES), or when the prize ball count value is “2400” or more in step S815 (step S815; YES). If it is the prize ball number notification effect period in step S811 (step S811; YES), it is determined whether or not the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S816).

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed in step S816 (step S816; NO), it is determined whether error notification is being executed (step S817). At this time, if the error notification is not being executed (step S817; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect in the highest layer (step S818), the number of prize balls is notified. The effect operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, a prize ball number notification effect such as displaying a prize ball number notification effect image as shown in FIG. 34C on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34C notifies the message “2000 GET” in response to the fact that the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit has reached “2000”. It includes a character image MM3 and a character image CA1 in which the message “2000 GET” is emitted as a dialogue. The display time of the prize ball number notification effect image (execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S817 (step S817; YES), operation control for executing a prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer in which the error notification is being executed. After (step S819), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 preferentially executes the error notification over the prize ball number notification effect such that the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Take control.

  If the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S816 (step S816; YES), an operation for executing the prize ball number notification effect in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S820), the award ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect in which the prize ball number notification effect image is displayed in a lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  In FIG. 30, when the process of step S820 is performed, the award ball number notification effect operation control process is ended, but the process of step S817 may be executed following the process of step S820. That is, operation control in a plurality of layers may be performed collectively in one execution of the award ball number notification effect operation control process (step S185). The same applies to other similar operation control processing (for example, cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing (step S186) in FIG. 31).

  After executing such a prize ball number notification effect operation control process in step S185 in FIG. 28, the cumulative number of prize balls for notifying the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit in the continuous chain. Effect operation control for executing the notification effect is performed (step S186).

(Cumulative award ball notification effect operation control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S186 of FIG. 28 as the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process. In this cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot promotion effect has ended (step S391). In the process of step S391, for example, a jackpot promotion effect flag that is turned on during execution of the jackpot promotion effect is provided, and determination may be made based on whether or not the jackpot promotion effect flag is on. .

  If the jackpot promotion effect has not ended in step S391 (step S391; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process ends. Thus, in this embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed until the jackpot promotion effect ends. This is an important effect that the player should pay attention to whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit in the first round to the fourth round in this embodiment is a promotion in which the gaming state becomes a probable state. However, until the end of the promotion effect during the big hit, whether the continuous Chang will continue by executing the cumulative prize-ball notification effect that will improve the effect on the premise that the continuous Chang will continue This is so as not to reduce the degree of attention to the promotion effect during the big hit, which also informs whether or not.

  When the big hit promotion effect is completed in step S391 (step S391; YES), it is determined based on, for example, the effect control pattern whether or not it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S392). ).

  If it is not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period in step S392 (step S392; NO), it is confirmed that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous chain has reached “5000”. It is determined whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect to be notified has been executed (step S393).

  In step S393, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “5000” has not been executed (step S393). S393: NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “5000” or more (step S394). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “5000” (step S394; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process ends.

  In step S393, when the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the chain has reached “5000” has been executed (step S393). S393; YES), it is determined whether or not the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the series has reached “10000” has been executed. (Step S395).

  In step S395, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the chain has reached “10000” has been executed (step S395). S395; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  In step S395, when the cumulative prize ball number notification effect for notifying that the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game has reached “10000” has not been executed (step S395). S395: NO), the cumulative prize ball count value stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 is read, and it is determined whether or not the read value is “10000” or more (step S396). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball count value is not equal to or greater than “10000” (step S396; NO), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated.

  When the cumulative prize ball count value is “5000” or more in step S394 (step S394; YES), or when the cumulative prize ball count value is “10000” or more in step S396 (step S396; YES). In step S392, if it is the cumulative prize ball number notification effect period (step S392; YES), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S397).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S397 (step S397; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thus, in this embodiment, when the prize ball number notification effect is being executed, the cumulative prize number notification effect is not executed. This is because the prize ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect are similar to each other, and when executed simultaneously, the degree of attention to any effect may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect is preferentially executed over the cumulative prize ball number notification effect. Note that a reduction in the degree of attention to any effect may be prevented by preferentially executing the accumulated prize ball number notification effect over the prize ball number notification effect.

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S397 (step S397; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S398). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S398; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S399).

  If the error notification is not being executed in step S399 (step S399; NO), after performing operation control for executing the cumulative prize ball number notification effect in the highest layer (step S900), the cumulative prize The ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect as shown in FIG. 34D is displayed on the highest layer.

  The cumulative prize ball number notification effect image shown in FIG. 34 (D) corresponds to the fact that the cumulative prize ball number paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000”. The character image MM4 that reports the message “!” And the character image CA2 that emits the message “5000OVER!” As a dialogue are included. The display time of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect image (the execution period of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect) may be, for example, 10 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S399 (step S399; YES), operation control is performed to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect in a layer lower than the layer for which error notification is being executed. (Step S901), the accumulated prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the error notification over the cumulative prize ball notification effect such as displaying the cumulative prize ball notification effect image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S398 (step S398; YES), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S902), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the cumulative award ball notification effect image is set to “2” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative prize ball notification effect image to be displayed in a layer lower than the layer where the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  In step S186 of FIG. 28, after such cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control processing is executed, operation control is performed to execute the continuous-chan number notification for informing the continuous-chan number (step S187).

(Consecutive number of times notification operation control processing)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S187 of FIG. 28 as the continuous channel number notification operation control process. In this continuous number of times notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S461). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S461; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S462).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S462 (step S462; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S463). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S463; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S464).

  When the error notification is not being executed in step S464 (step S464; NO), after performing the operation control for executing the continuous channel number notification in the highest layer (step S465), the continuous channel number notification is performed. The operation control process ends. Thereby, for example, continuous channel count notification such as that shown in FIG. 34E is displayed on the uppermost layer.

  34E includes a character image MM5 that reports a message “big hit × N (N is the number of consecutive chunks)” corresponding to the number of consecutive chunks. In addition, the notification (display) time of the continuous channel count may be, for example, 5 seconds.

  If error notification is being executed in step S464 (step S464; YES), after performing operation control for executing continuous channel count notification in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. (Step S466), the continuous channel number notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0” and the Z value of the continuous change number notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the CPU 120 for effect control performs control to preferentially execute error notification over continuous channel number notification, such as displaying a continuous channel number notification image on a layer lower than the layer where the error notification image is displayed. Do.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S463 (step S463; YES), the operation control for executing the continuous change number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. (Step S467), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability change confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the continuous change count notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the certain change confirmation notification effect rather than the continuous change number notification, such as displaying the continuous change number notification image on a layer lower than the layer on which the certain change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Perform control to be executed.

  When the prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 (step S462; YES), the continuous number of times notification is executed in a lower layer than the layer where the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S468), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the prize ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control gives priority to the effect of notifying the number of consecutive balls over the notification of the number of times of consecutive chants, such as displaying the consecutive number of times of informing notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the prize ball number informing effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S461 (step S461; YES), the consecutive number of times notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer where the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for this (step S469), the continuous number of times notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the continuous number of times notification image is set to “3” and registered. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 causes the cumulative number-of-balls notification effect to be displayed rather than the continuous number-of-times notification, such as displaying the continuous number-of-times notification image on a lower layer than the layer on which the cumulative-number-of-balls notification effect image is displayed. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  After executing such a continuous number of times notification operation control process in step S187 of FIG. 28, a big hit middle song name notification operation control process for notifying the song name being played during the big hit is executed (step S188). ).

(Big hit midway song name notification operation control process)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S188 of FIG. 28 as the jackpot song name notification operation control process. In the jackpot song name notification operation control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S471). At this time, if the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not being executed (step S471; NO), it is determined whether or not the prize ball number notification effect is being executed (step S472).

  If the prize ball number notification effect is not being executed in step S472 (step S472; NO), it is determined whether the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed (step S473). At this time, if the probability change confirmation notification effect is not being executed (step S473; NO), it is determined whether an error notification is being executed (step S474).

  When error notification is not being executed in step S474 (step S474; NO), after performing operation control for executing the big hit middle song name notification in the highest layer (step S475), the big hit middle song The name notification operation control process is terminated. Thereby, for example, the big hit mid-song name notification such as displaying the big hit mid-song title notification image as shown in FIG. 34F on the uppermost layer is executed.

  The jackpot / medium song name notification shown in FIG. 34 (F) includes a character image MM6 for reporting a message “MUSIC: xxxxxxxx (where xxxxxxxx is a song name)” corresponding to the song name being played during the jackpot. It is out. In addition, the notification (display) time of the music name (execution time of the music name notification during the big hit) may be, for example, 30 seconds.

  When error notification is being executed in step S474 (step S474; YES), operation control is performed to execute song name notification during jackpot in a layer lower than the layer in which error notification is being executed. After (step S476), the big hit medium music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the error notification image is set to “0”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control preferentially executes the error notification over the jackpot song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the error notification image. Take control.

  When the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S473 (step S473; YES), an operation for executing the jackpot song name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed. After performing the control (step S477), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the probability variation confirmation notification effect image is set to “1”, and the Z value of the jackpot music name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the CPU 120 for effect control prioritizes the probability change confirmation notification effect over the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the jackpot song name notification image in a layer lower than the layer where the probability change confirmation notification effect image is displayed. Control to be executed automatically.

  If the winning ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 (step S472; YES), the big hit hit song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the winning ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control (step S478), the big hit midway song name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the winning ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. Thereby, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning ball number notification effect rather than the big hit song name notification, such as displaying the big hit number song name notification image on a lower layer than the layer displaying the winning ball number notification effect image. The control to execute the process preferentially is performed.

  When the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed in step S471 (step S471; YES), the jackpot song name notification is executed in a layer lower than the layer in which the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is being executed. After performing the operation control for performing the operation (step S479), the big hit mid-music name notification operation control process is terminated. In the present embodiment, as described above, the Z value of the cumulative award ball number notification effect image is set to “2”, and the Z value of the jackpot song name notification image is set to “3” and registered. . As a result, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of cumulative award balls than that of the jackpot music name notification, such as displaying the jackpot music name notification image on a lower layer than the layer on which the cumulative number of balls notification effect image is displayed. Control to preferentially execute the notification effect is performed.

  If a jackpot end designation command is received in step S181 shown in FIG. 28 (step S181; YES), a jackpot end notification effect time is set (step S189). In the process of step S189, for example, one of a plurality of types of jackpot end notification effect time is selected and set corresponding to the jackpot end effect waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11. do it. More specifically, the same time as the jackpot end presentation waiting time specified by the jackpot end designation command may be set as the jackpot end notification effect time.

  Subsequent to the process of step S189, a jackpot end notification effect control pattern is set (step S190). In the process of step S190, for example, it corresponds to the control contents of whether or not the probability change state specified by the jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the jackpot end notification effect time set in the process of step S189, etc. And what is necessary is just to select and use the pattern used as a usage pattern from the multiple types of jackpot end notification effect control patterns prepared in advance.

  After performing the process of step S190, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” (step S191), and then the effect process at the time of opening the attacker is ended. When the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” and the next timer interruption occurs, the ending effect process (step S175) shown in FIG. 15 is executed.

  FIG. 36 shows an operation for displaying a notification image in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the prize ball number notification effect, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. An example is shown. For example, when the number of winning balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, whether or not it is the execution period of the continuous number of times notification, the song name notification during the big hit, and the cumulative winning ball number notification effect. Regardless of whether or not, in the process of step S818 in the award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30, as shown in FIG. 36A, the operation control for executing the award ball number notification effect in the uppermost layer. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000”, the process after step S397 in the cumulative prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 31 is executed. Is done. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in step S397 shown in FIG. 31, the reason is that the prize ball number notification effect is being executed. As shown in 36 (A), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot song name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the award ball number notification effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. While the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the layer, the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer, while the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is not executed.

  FIG. 37 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap. Show. For example, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control process of FIG. 29 is performed regardless of whether or not it is an execution period of the number of winning balls notification effect, the notification of the number of consecutive chants, and the jackpot song name notification. In the process of step S804 in FIG. 37, as shown in FIG. 37A, the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the uppermost layer.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability change confirmation notification effect is executed in the process of step S820. Operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed in a layer lower than the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, the processing of step S478 in the jackpot-song music name notification operation control processing of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  In this way, when the execution periods of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the prize ball number notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. The probability change confirmation notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and the continuous number of times notification and jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  FIG. 38 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, consecutive number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. Yes. For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, whether or not it is an execution period of a prize ball number notification effect, a continuous number of times notification, or a jackpot song name notification. First, in the process of step S143 in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 38A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit reaches “2000”, the process after step S816 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. 30 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S819, as shown in FIG. Operation control for executing a prize ball number notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S468 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed to execute the continuous number of times notification in a lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the prize ball number notification effect is performed, in the process of step S478 in the jackpot music name notification operation control process of FIG. As shown in (), the operation control for performing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed is performed.

  As described above, when the execution periods of error notification, prize ball number notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 38 (B), error notification is performed in the highest layer. Is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed in the lower layer, and the consecutive number of times notification and the jackpot music name notification are executed in the lower layer.

  FIG. 39 shows an operation example in which a notification image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap. . For example, when an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet is detected, regardless of whether or not it is the execution period of the probability change confirmation notification effect, the continuous number of times notification, and the jackpot music name notification In the process of step S143 in FIG. 14, as shown in FIG. 39A, operation control for executing error notification in the uppermost layer is performed.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, processing in step S803 and subsequent steps in the probability variation confirmation notification effect operation control processing in FIG. 29 is executed. In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the error notification is performed, in the process of step S805, as shown in FIG. Operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed in the layer.

  In the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S467 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process of FIG. 32, FIG. As shown in the drawing, operation control is performed to perform continuous channel number notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  Further, in the case of this example, since the operation control for executing the probability change confirmation notification effect is performed, in the process of step S477 in the jackpot song name notification operation control processing of FIG. 33, FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, operation control is performed for executing the jackpot music name notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed.

  Thus, when the execution periods of error notification, probability change confirmation notification effect, continuous number of times notification, and jackpot song name notification overlap, as shown in FIG. 39B, error notification is performed in the highest layer. At the same time, a certainty change confirmation notification effect is executed in a lower layer, and a continuous change count notification and a jackpot music name notification are executed in a lower layer.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to include all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  As an example, in the above-described embodiment, for example, an error notification corresponding to a magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is performed for an act of illegally guiding a game ball to a winning opening using a magnet, for example. Explained as a thing. On the other hand, as abnormalities, in addition to the above-described radio wave abnormalities, vibration abnormalities, radio wave abnormalities, front door opening abnormalities, payout mechanism abnormalities, illegal prize winning abnormalities at the big prize opening, and the lower plate are full. There may be an abnormality and the like may be detected using an abnormality detection sensor group or the like. And about these abnormalities, the priority should just be respectively set with respect to other alerting | reporting similarly to the error alerting | reporting in the said embodiment. In that case, a priority order may be set for each type of abnormality in consideration of the severity.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the prize ball number notification effect was demonstrated as what alert | reports the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit as a specific period. On the other hand, the specific period may be a period other than the big hit such as one round or one minute. With such a configuration, for example, a prize ball number notification effect can be executed at a suitable timing in accordance with a difference in the number of prize balls to be paid out when a game ball passes through a big winning opening.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball notification effect has been described as notifying the cumulative number of prize balls that have been paid out as a prize ball during a big hit during a consecutive period as a special period. On the other hand, the special period may be a period other than during continuous chaining, such as one day or one week. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to execute the cumulative prize ball number notification effect at a suitable timing in accordance with the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by passing the game ball through the big prize opening, the difference in the continuous rate, etc. it can.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the probability change confirmation alert | report was demonstrated as an example of the alerting | reporting regarding a state, it is not restricted to this. For example, in a mode in which the player is notified that the game ball is allowed to pass through the specific area (for example, right-handed notification), and the big hit is determined when the game ball has passed the predetermined area, the specific area for the player Notification that game ball is allowed to pass through, Notification that game ball has passed the predetermined area, Notification by probability variation promotion effect, Notification by round number promotion effect, Promotion regarding ST number or short-time number (Increase from the initial notification number) Notification regarding the continuous chain within the hold (confirmation notification of the continuous chain within the hold, notification of the expected degree of the continuous chain within the hold), notification regarding the remaining number of ST times or the number of short times.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the priority order is determined by setting the Z value for each notification image. On the other hand, for the priority of each notification, for example, error notification is executed preferentially over the probability change confirmation notification effect, and error notification is executed preferentially over the winning ball number notification effect, while error notification and probability change are performed. When the confirmation notification effect and the prize ball number notification effect are executed simultaneously, the priority order of each notification is determined according to the combination of notifications executed simultaneously, such as the probability change confirmation notification effect is preferentially executed over the error notification. It may be changed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute notification according to a combination of notifications executed simultaneously.

  In the above-described embodiment, for example, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches “5000” or “10000” by winning the final count of the final round, the cumulative winning ball number notification effect is in the ending effect. Will be executed. However, when probability variation control is performed after the end of the ending effect, the cumulative award ball number notification effect is not performed during the fanfare effect when the next big hit occurs without executing the cumulative award ball number notification effect during the ending effect. (I.e., the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed after the next big hit and before the big winning opening is opened). In place of the above, at the start of the first round of the next big hit (even if there is no win in the big prize opening), the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed, or the first round of the next big hit When there is an initial winning, an accumulative number-of-balls notification effect may be performed. With such a configuration, even if the time for the ending effect is short, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be suitably executed.

  Similarly, when the probability variation control is not performed after the ending effect is finished (for example, when only the high opening control is performed), the next big hit is performed without executing the cumulative prize-ball notification effect during the ending effect. During the fanfare production when the event occurs, the cumulative prize ball number notification production may be executed, or at the start of the first round of the next jackpot or when the first prize is received in the first round of the next jackpot In addition, a cumulative prize ball number notification effect may be performed. In addition, when the probability variation control is terminated without generating a big hit next time (for example, when the ST count is terminated), or when the high opening control is terminated, when the probability variation control or the high opening control is terminated, You may make it perform cumulative prize ball number notification effect. When the probability change control is not performed after the end of the ending effect (for example, when neither the probability change control nor the high opening control is performed), the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is performed (the hold is not When there is no ending effect, the accumulated prize ball number notification effect may be executed.

  In the above embodiment, when a so-called over-winning occurs in the final round, a notification effect related to the over-winning may be executed during the ending effect, or the first variable display after the end of the ending effect is displayed. When it is performed (when the ending effect ends when there is no hold), the notification effect related to the overwinning may be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the total winning ball number notification effect for notifying the total winning ball number acquired in the big hit gaming state and the short time state in the continuous chain may be executed during the big hit. And also in such embodiment, the priority degree with respect to another alerting | reporting should just be set about the total prize ball number alerting | reporting effect. With such a configuration, even when the total prize ball number notification effect and other notifications are executed simultaneously, each notification can be suitably executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, regardless of whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the jackpot promotion effect is completed in the process of step S391 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process of FIG. However, before executing such processing, it is determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed, and if the jackpot promotion effect is executed, in step S391 On the other hand, in the case where the process of executing the process is not executed, the process after step S392 may be executed without executing the process of step S391. With such a configuration, even when the jackpot promotion effect is not executed, the cumulative prize-ball number notification effect can be executed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed when the cumulative number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during the big hit in the continuous game reaches “5000” and “10000”. Explained. On the other hand, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect has a larger number of prize balls than “10000” such as “5000”, “10000”, “20000”, “30000”,. It may also be executed when the is acquired. With such a configuration, attention to the cumulative prize ball number notification effect can be continued.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the prize ball number alerting | reporting effect is being performed, it demonstrated that the cumulative prize ball number alerting effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if the prize ball number notification effect is executed, the prize ball number notification effect is executed, for example, the cumulative prize ball number notification effect is executed in a period before and after the prize ball number notification effect is executed. And the execution periods of the cumulative prize ball number notification effect may not overlap. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute both the award ball number notification effect and the cumulative prize ball number notification effect.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the volume status display image VL indicating the adjustment status of the volume adjustment is displayed. However, in addition to the volume status display image VL, the display screen of the image display device 5 and the like A luminance status display image indicating the adjustment status of the luminance adjustment may be displayed. Alternatively, only the luminance status display image may be displayed instead of the volume status display image VL. For example, the sound volume status display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process (step S348) shown in FIG. . Further, instead of the volume status display image VL, for example, a mode status display image indicating a mode status which is the execution frequency of the hold change notice may be displayed. Further, the mode status display image may be displayed together with at least one of the volume status display image VL and the luminance status display image.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24C, the volume status display image VL is erased and cannot be viewed, but the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a form that is difficult to view. Good. For example, the volume status display image VL may be displayed in a semi-transparent display mode, or may be displayed in a very small reduced display mode (micro display mode). Moreover, you may make it alert | report that a sound volume adjustment is always possible. For example, you may make it alert | report by the telop display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. Moreover, you may make it alert | report by the description effect display in a variable display effect that volume adjustment is always possible. The execution of the telop display and the explanation effect display is not limited to the variable display, but may be possible in a customer waiting state (so-called customer waiting), a big hit gaming state, or the like.

  In the above embodiment, during the super reach production, unless requested by the player, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. However, in the big hit gaming state, the volume status display image VL may not be displayed unless requested by the player. In this case, the volume status display process shown in FIG. 16 and the temporary display process shown in FIG. 23 may be modified so as to be executed during the big hit. For example, instead of determining whether or not the super reach effect is being produced in the volume status display process, determining whether or not the big hit effect is being executed, or changing each operation flag to an operation flag in accordance with the big hit time, etc. Thus, the volume status display process can be executed during the big hit. The same applies to the temporary display process. Further, the temporary display process may be modified as a process included in the attacker opening effect process shown in FIG. For example, the temporary display process may be modified as a process executed between any of steps S184 to S188, or immediately before and after. In addition, when performing an ending effect display, you may make it display the volume condition display image VL on the image display apparatus 5 also about an ending effect period. According to such a modified example, the volume status display image VL is displayed in response to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of a specific effect (for example, a round effect during a big hit, a blessing effect during a big hit). It is possible to display (display the adjustment status of effect adjustment), and to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, the detection control based on the music selection during the big hit may be prioritized over the adjustment status detection control. That is, during the music selection, it is possible that production adjustment (for example, status display such as volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) is impossible. In particular, this is effective when an operation for music selection and an operation for production adjustment are performed by the same operation means (for example, a cross button).

  In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described, but it may be applied to a slot machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, the first state is, for example, a gaming state other than a super reach effect or a state waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, and a specific effect (for example, a super reach effect) Etc.) is executed in a second state (for example, a gaming state during a super reach effect), but is not limited to this. For example, in a slot machine, the first state is a gaming state other than a continuous production performed between a plurality of games or a state of waiting for a customer and not displaying an error. Etc.) may be set to a second state (for example, a gaming state during a continuous production).

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 may have a special effect such as a congratulatory effect (character introduction), a promotion effect, a V prize notification, etc. in the pachinko machine 1, and an AT notification (assist time notification), an ART notification (assist) in the slot machine. Replay time notification), jackpot 1G continuous notification (single game continuous notification), continuous jackpot notification, and the like may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” and “probability” at which various decisions are made may be 0% (not decided) or 100% (not necessarily decided), such as 70:30, for example. So that the possibility of at least one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, the ratio of the determination result of any one of the plurality of determination results is higher than the ratio of the determination result of other determination results. It may be included to be 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. It will be higher than the ratio.

  Further, the special symbols and decorative symbols are not limited to those variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured using a plurality of LEDs, and only a specific (single) LED among the plurality of LEDs is displayed during variable display of the special symbol. Is repeatedly turned on and off, and the other LEDs are kept off. And when the variable display result is “losing”, the LED that has been repeatedly turned on and off emits light (lights) in a predetermined emission color, or maintains the light off state, Stop displaying special symbols. At this time, the other LEDs remain off. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the special symbol is stopped and displayed by a predetermined lighting pattern in which some or all of the LEDs are turned on. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, a specific (single) symbol is switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. Good. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (stop display) as a final stop symbol (determined special symbol or definite ornament symbol) resulting in a variable display result of the special symbol or ornament symbol. Further, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are configured by using a 7-segment LED, and during the variable display of the special symbol, a symbol indicating “−” (lighting) is displayed. It may be configured such that other numbers and symbols are not displayed by repeating the non-display (off). As a special symbol variable display result, a symbol indicating “−” is not stopped and displayed as a predetermined lighting pattern including numbers indicating “1” to “9” and other symbols. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. In this way, during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, as a variable display result, symbols that are not stopped are switched between display and non-display, while other symbols are maintained in a non-display state. May be.

  In the above embodiment, one change pattern designation command is transmitted when variable display is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the change pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative design, and the like. Although an example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command before reaching reach, such as the presence or absence of quasi-continuous fluctuation (if it does not reach, the so-called second (2) Before the stop, send a command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode, and after the second command has reached reach, such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if not reach) A command indicating a variable display time or a variable display mode after the so-called second stop may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in variable display based on a variable display time derived from a combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the variable display time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific variable display mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control CPU 120. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after the first command is sent, after a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be transmitted. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the pre-reading determination is performed on the main side and the command corresponding to the determination result is transmitted to the sub-side, but the command indicating the random value is transmitted from the main side and the pre-reading determination is performed on the sub-side. You may make it do.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display device, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the light emitter unit, game effect lamp, and decoration LED are also included. Various rendering operations and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 8 includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is determined based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. It has been explained that it is established and is controlled to a probable change state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a big winning opening (second large winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The winning prize opening (second winning prize opening) of the probability variation attacker can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “15”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

(1-1) The gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) described above includes music reproduction means that is realized by the production control CPU 120 in cooperation with the audio control board 13 and the like. In addition, the gaming machine is configured to be able to select a piece of music to be played in a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit gaming state) from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C). Has been. The music playback means can play back the music during a specific period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17). A specific part different from the beginning of the music is reproduced (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17). According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

The jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker is repeatedly released, that is, a round gaming period, but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot period includes a fanfare effect period that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, a period in which the attacker opens repeatedly (round game period), and a ending effect period that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It is good also as a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state.
Further, the specific period is not limited to the period in the big hit gaming state, and how to determine the period is arbitrary. For example, the specific period may be a super reach production period. In this case, the music determination process shown in FIG. 17 is transformed into a process for determining a music before or during the super reach period, and the determined music is transformed into the process of the transformation or the reach effect control in step S349. What is necessary is just to reproduce | regenerate in a process etc. Further, the specific period may be a probable change state, a short time state, or the like.
Further, the specifying unit is not limited to the “rust” of the music as described above. Depending on the music, a part other than “rust” (A melody, etc.) may be used as the specific part. Moreover, the specific part may be the head part of the music. That is, the data used as the specific unit may be different depending on the music.

(1-2) In addition, in the gaming machine described above, there are a plurality of music determination methods at the time of music selection (for example, when a predetermined music determination operation is performed, or the grand prize opening is closed in the first round) Then, the selected music is determined in step S631 in FIG. 17). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  Note that there may be a plurality of music determination methods by using a plurality of music determination operations. For example, there may be a plurality of configurations capable of detecting the operation content according to the operation by the player using a non-contact sensor such as the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or an infrared sensor. Further, not only the example in which the selected music piece is determined when the grand prize opening is closed in the first round, but the music piece is determined according to the closing of the big winning opening in any round other than the first round. The music may be determined according to the end of the first hit or the music may be determined. Further, there may be only one music determination method.

(1-3) Further, in the gaming machine described above, music can be selected in an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, during execution of the first round in the big hit gaming state). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection.

  Note that the advantageous state may be during execution of a round other than the first round. Further, the advantageous state is not limited to the big hit gaming state. For example, a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the first round number in which the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is greater than the second round number (for example, “7”). The big hit gaming state (for example, “15”) may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used. Further, it may be possible to select a music other than in an advantageous state.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine described above is a display means (for example, FIG. 19 (FIG. 19)) that displays an image corresponding to a music played during a specific period and corresponding to a specific part when selecting a music. B) is provided with an image display device 5 or the like that displays a music-corresponding image in the display area VA1. According to such a structure, the production effect at the time of music selection can be improved.

  Note that the image (music-corresponding image) corresponding to the specifying unit may be a moving image or a still image as described above. Further, the music-corresponding image may not be displayed when the music is selected.

(3) In addition, the gaming machine described above stores one piece of music as a plurality of divided voice data including specific part data indicating the voice of the specific part (for example, in the storage unit (for example, FIG. 19A). As shown, a plurality of audio data including chorus data such as ROM 121 is stored,
The music reproducing means reproduces the specific part of one music based on the specific part data at the time of selecting the music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S628 of FIG. 17), and a plurality of music in the specific period. The piece of music data is connected to reproduce one piece of music (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step S634 in FIG. 17). According to such a configuration, the burden of data capacity can be reduced.

  As described above, the music-corresponding image data may also be stored in the ROM 121 or the like in a mode (each as separate image data) divided for each part of the music, like the audio data of the music. In this way, the burden of data capacity can be further reduced. Further, both the audio data indicating one piece of music and the image data corresponding to the piece of music may not be stored in a plurality of divided forms.

(4) Also, according to the gaming machine described above (pachinko gaming machine 1), as shown in FIG. 27A, in the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach production, the player's stick Regardless of whether or not the controller 31A is operated (player's action), the volume status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is displayed on the image display device 5 so as to be visible. The display image VL can always be visually recognized. Further, in the game state (second state) during the super reach effect in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, the volume status display image VL is made invisible and the player operates the stick controller 31A. Displays the volume status display image VL based on the player's operation of the stick controller 31A until a predetermined period elapses after the operation (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The specific effect is an effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state. For this reason, while suppressing the fall of the production effect about a super reach production, the volume condition display image VL can be displayed according to a player's request, and the interest property of a game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 28 (I) and 29 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position that does not cover the decorative pattern at the time of the fluctuation stop, so that the final stopped pattern of the decorative pattern, that is, The sound volume can be adjusted while not obstructing the visual recognition of the game result.

  In the game state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of display of the volume state display image VL) from the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A by the player. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In the above description, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach effect, but the period before the super reach effect is executed (before the start) or after the super reach effect is executed (after the end). It is good also as either state. In addition, the first state may be at least one of a period before the execution of the super reach effect in one change (before the start) or a period after the execution of the super reach effect in one change (after the end). In addition, the second state may be a state of a period for executing the super reach effect in one change. Further, the second state may be a special state that tends to be an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state. This special state is a probability change state or a short time state. Further, the special state is a state in which the game ball is not frequently won (or may be passed or entered) in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and is frequently changed from the first mode to the second mode that is easy to win. There may be.

  Further, according to the player's operation of the stick controller 31A (player's action) before shifting from the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect. When the display of the volume state display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach effect is being performed, but a predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended until a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection or transition of the player's motion (see FIGS. 31A and 31B). Therefore, the display of the volume status display image VL can be extended and displayed for a predetermined period even after the super reach effect is being produced. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment started just before the start of the super reach production from being terminated halfway at the start timing of the super reach production, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased midway. You can prevent the uncomfortable feeling of being done. Moreover, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 31A again immediately after the start of the super reach effect, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  Contrary to the above, the player's operation of the stick controller 31A (the player's operation) before the transition from the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect to the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect. Display of the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state transitions from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect ends. When the game state other than the super reach effect is entered but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued even after the transition to the first state. A process of deleting the display of the volume status display image VL when the period has elapsed can be eliminated. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit a useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once when a predetermined period has elapsed and starting display again. In addition, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling that the display of the volume state display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed.

(5) The gaming machine described above is a notification effect executing means for executing a notification effect (for example, a prize ball number notification effect, a winning number notification effect, a cumulative prize number notification effect, a cumulative winning number notification effect, a probability change confirmation notification effect). For example, a CPU 120 for effect control for executing a promotion effect during the jackpot promotion, etc.). Then, the notification effect executing means is a first notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired in the specific period as the notification effect (for example, the number of prize balls for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a winning ball during the big hit) Effect) and a second notification effect for notifying the magnitude of the value acquired during the special period (for example, a prize ball number notification effect for notifying the number of prize balls paid out as a prize ball during a big hit in consecutive Chang) The first notification effect and the second notification effect have different priorities (for example, in the process of step S397 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process in FIG. If it is being executed, the cumulative prize number notifying effect is not executed). According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification effects can be suitably executed.

The notification effect executing means can execute a third notification for notifying that a special game state (for example, a probable change state) is set as the notification effect, and the priority of the third notification is higher than the first notification. (For example, when the probability change confirmation notification effect is being executed in step S216 in the prize ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. 30, the layer lower than the layer in which the probability change notification notification effect is being executed in step S220. For example, performing a motion control for executing a prize ball number notification effect in a layer).
In addition, the notification effect execution means can execute a fourth notification (for example, a notification of the number of consecutive chunks for notifying the number of consecutive chunks) for notifying the number of times that the advantageous state has been controlled during the special period as the notification effect. The priority level of the first notification is higher than the notification (for example, when the award ball number notification effect is being executed in step S462 in the continuous channel number notification operation control process in FIG. 32, the prize ball number notification is performed in step S468. For example, performing operation control for executing the continuous number of times notification in a layer lower than the layer in which the production is performed).
In addition, the notification effect executing means is a fifth notification for notifying information related to other effects executed in a specific period as the notification effect (for example, a jackpot song name notification for notifying a song name being played during the jackpot). Can be executed, and the priority of the first notification is higher than the fifth notification (for example, when the winning ball number notification effect is being executed in step S472 in the jackpot song name notification operation control process in FIG. 33). According to any of these configurations, the operation control for executing the jackpot music name notification in the lower layer than the layer in which the prize ball number notification effect is executed in step S478) Notification can be executed.

In addition, the notification effect execution means is a sixth notification that notifies whether or not a special value is given in a specific period as the notification effect (for example, a jackpot promotion effect that becomes a notification effect of whether or not to control to a probable change state or the like) ) Can be executed, and the execution of the second notification may be limited until the sixth notification is executed (for example, in step S391 in the cumulative award ball number notification effect operation control process shown in FIG. If is not completed, the cumulative prize number notifying effect is not executed). In such a configuration, it is possible to execute notification in accordance with the production situation.
In addition, at least one of various notifications may be executable during a period (for example, during continuous change) from when the advantageous state is controlled to when the normal state is controlled. In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the period from the control to the advantageous state to the control to the normal state.

In addition, the layer allocated to each of 1st alerting | reporting-6th alerting | reporting is arbitrary. Different layers may be assigned for each notification, and among various notifications, there may be a plurality of notifications to which a common layer is assigned.
In addition, an arbitrary layer may be assigned for the notification of the name of the selected music and the notification regarding the volume status display (for example, any Z value of 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 35A is being selected). Assigned to notifications of music names and notifications related to volume status display). Also, for example, for the display layer of image data (image showing a song name or music-corresponding image data such as PV) at the time of music selection shown in FIG. 19B, the Z value is 3 or 2 and 3 Or between 1 and 2. Moreover, the layer of the image at the time of the music selection shown in FIG. 19B and the image after the music determination shown in FIG. 19C may be changed (the Z value assigned to each may be changed). . That is, the priority order of image display related to music may be different before and after the music is determined.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later. For example, the present invention does not have to include all the components of the gaming machine described in (1-1) to (1-3) and (2) to (5) above, and can achieve the object. If possible, deletion or addition of components is optional.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that performs a game (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or pachinko gaming machine 901), and a plurality of operation units (for example, stick controller 9031A) that can be operated by the player. , Push button 9031B, volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B) and operation processing execution means capable of executing operation processing corresponding to the operation of the operation unit (for example, the production control CPU 90120 operates the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B). A portion that performs an effect corresponding to the operation based on the reception of the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A of the stick controller 9031A or the push sensor 9035B of the push button 9031B in the operation effective period during which is effective. CPU for control And 0120 is a part that executes an operation process corresponding to the operation based on the reception of the detection signal from the button switch unit 9043 during the operation effective period in which the operation of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is effective. A music playback means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes step S634 in FIG. 17) capable of playing music during a specific period (for example, a period in a big hit gaming state) is provided, and the operation unit includes a first operation unit ( For example, it includes a stick controller 9031A) and a second operation unit (for example, push button 9031B, volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B), and the operation processing execution means performs an operation (for example, a first operation mode) in the first operation unit. , Repeated striking operation) or the second operation mode different from the first operation mode. When there is an operation (for example, a long press operation), a corresponding operation process corresponding to each operation mode is executed (for example, when the stick controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous operation)) The CPU 90120 performs an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation.When the stick controller 9031A is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), The portion for performing the effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 over the period during which the effect control CPU 90120 is being pressed, and the operation of the third operation mode in the second operation unit (for example, continuous hitting) When there is an operation, one of the corresponding operation processes corresponding to the third operation mode is executed (for example, push button 9 When 031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation. ), When there is an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, a long press operation) that is different from the third operation mode, non-corresponding operation processing that does not correspond to the fourth operation mode is executed (for example, When the operation promotion effect for prompting the continuous hit operation is executed in the advance notice effect executed during the automatic continuous hit effective period, when the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control CPU 90120 pushes The part which performs the production | presentation which changes the image currently displayed on the production | presentation display apparatus 905 similarly to when the button 9031B is operated several times continuously (continuous hitting operation).) The music reproduced | regenerated in the said specific period. It is possible to select from a plurality of types of music (for example, music A to F shown in FIG. 18C), and the music playback means selects at the time of music selection Of a part of the music reproducing the different specific portions from the beginning of the musical composition (e.g., such that the effect control CPU120 executes the step S628 in FIG. 17) the gaming machine and the like.

  According to the above gaming machine, it is possible to improve the production effect at the time of music selection. Further, since the operation unit includes the first operation unit that executes only the corresponding operation process, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience due to the execution of the non-corresponding operation process not intended by the player. In particular, when music selection is performed using the operation unit, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience that an unintended music is selected by executing an unsupported operation process unintended by the player.

  Further, in the gaming machine, the music selection may be performed using only the first operation unit in which the non-corresponding operation process is not executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of an inconvenience that an unintended music piece is selected by executing a non-corresponding operation process unintended by the player. In addition, music selection may be performed using only the second operation unit, or may be performed using both the first operation unit and the second operation unit. When selecting music using both the first operation unit and the second operation unit, the cursor movement to the selected music is the first from the viewpoint of preventing inconvenience that an unintended music is selected. It is desirable that the final selection determination operation can be executed by the first operation unit while the operation by the two operation units is enabled.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of a gaming machine that can improve convenience while suppressing an erroneous operation by a player, a gaming machine that can play a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901), A plurality of operation units (for example, stick controller 9031A, push button 9031B, volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B) that can be operated by the user, and operation processing execution means (for example, operation processing corresponding to the operation of the operation unit) Based on the fact that the effect control CPU 90120 receives detection signals from the controller sensor unit 9035A of the stick controller 9031A and the push sensor 9035B of the push button 9031B in the operation valid period in which the operation of the stick controller 9031A and push button 9031B is effective. The A portion that executes an effect according to the work, and that the effect control CPU 90120 receives the detection signal from the button switch unit 9043 during the operation effective period in which the operation of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is effective. The operation unit includes a first operation unit (for example, a stick controller 9031A) and a second operation unit (for example, a push button 9031B and a volume adjustment button 9042A). , 9042B), and the operation processing execution means is an operation of the first operation mode (for example, continuous operation) or an operation of the second operation mode different from the first operation mode in the first operation unit. (For example, a long press operation), a corresponding operation process corresponding to each operation mode is executed (for example, a sticking operation). When the controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation. When the stick controller 9031A is pressed (long press) for a predetermined period, the effect control CPU 90120 performs an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 over the period of the pressing operation. .), When there is an operation in the third operation mode (for example, continuous operation) in the second operation unit, one of the corresponding operation processes corresponding to the third operation mode is executed (for example, the push button 9031B is When the operation is continuously performed a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the CPU 90120 for effect control corresponds to the timing corresponding to each operation. The part which performs the effect which changes the image currently displayed on the effect display device 905 by the operation. ), When there is an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, a long press operation) that is different from the third operation mode, non-corresponding operation processing not corresponding to the fourth operation mode is executed (for example, When the operation promotion effect for prompting the continuous hit operation is executed in the advance notice effect executed during the automatic continuous hit effective period, when the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation), the effect control CPU 90120 pushes A part that executes an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 40 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is an opposing surface that faces the player when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a portion described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1”.

  FIG. 40 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment and shows the layout of the main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 (gauge board) that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 (base frame) that supports and fixes the gaming board 902. On the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In the game area, a game ball is launched from a ball striking device and is shot.

  A first special symbol display 904A and a second special symbol display 904B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 40, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B is composed of, for example, a 7 segment LED or a dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, are displayed so as to be variable (also referred to as variable display or variable display).

  An effect display device 905 is provided near the center of the game area of the game board 902. The effect display device 905 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 905, for example, there are three corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 904A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 904B. In the effect symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display parts, the effect symbols (also referred to as decorative symbols), which are a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified, are variably displayed. This variation display of the effect symbol is also included in the variation display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R are arranged in the display area of the effect display device 905. Then, in response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 904B, “Left Variation of the effect symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started in each of the effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R. Thereafter, the confirmed effect symbols (final stop symbols) are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R of the effect display device 905.

  In this manner, in the display area of the effect display device 905, the special game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 904A or the second special figure on the second special symbol display 904B is used. In synchronism with the special figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner, and a definite effect symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). Note that the variable display may be temporarily stopped during the dynamic display of the effect symbol.

  A first reserved storage display area 905D and a second reserved storage display area 905U are set at two locations on the left and right sides of the display area of the effect display device 905. In the first on-hold storage display area 905D and the second on-hold storage display area 905U, the on-hold storage display for displaying the variable display on-hold storage number (the special figure on-hold storage number) corresponding to the special game is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 40, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B together with the hold storage display area. A display 9025A and a second hold display 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner.

  Below the effect display device 905, an ordinary winning ball device 906A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The normal winning ball device 906A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 906B has an electric motor having a pair of movable blades that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 906A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start switch 9022A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 9022B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 "), the second start condition is satisfied.

  A special variable winning ball device 907 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 907 is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for the large winning opening shown in FIG. As a big prize opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 9023, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 907 that has been opened, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings (for example, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening). More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering).

  A normal symbol display 9020 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 902 (in the example shown in FIG. 40, on the left side of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs, etc., like the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Is displayed (variable display) so that it can be variably displayed. Such a normal symbol variation display is referred to as a general game (also referred to as a “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display device 9020, a general symbol hold display device 9025C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passage gate 9041.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 902 is provided with a windmill and a number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. In addition, at the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in game balls that have not entered any winning port.

  Speakers 908L and 908R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and an effect LED 909 is provided in the periphery of the gaming area. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area 9010 is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area 9010, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied to a launching device (not shown). An upper plate 9090 (hit ball supply plate) that is held (stored) is provided. A lower tray 9091 that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper tray 9090 and the like so as to be discharged out of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided below the gaming machine frame 903.

  A member that forms the lower plate 9091 is provided with a stick controller 9031A, and a member that forms the upper plate 9090 is provided with a push button 9031B. The tilt operation of the stick controller 9031A is detected by the controller sensor unit 9035A, and the pressing operation performed on the push button 9031B is detected by the push sensor 9035B. When the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B are operated within an operation effective period during which an operation is effectively received in a notice effect, which will be described later, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed.

  In addition, the member forming the upper plate 9090 is provided with two volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B for adjusting the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R. The volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are arranged side by side so that the player can operate, and after the pachinko gaming machine 901 is activated, a state where the change display of the special symbol or the normal symbol is stopped for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) When the volume adjustment button 9042A arranged on the right side is pressed during the demonstration effect period that is executed when it continues, the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R increases, and the volume adjustment button arranged on the left side When the user presses the 9042B, the volume output from the speakers 908L and 908R decreases. By operating the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, the volume of the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R can be appropriately adjusted between “1” and “9”.

  It should be noted that a button switch unit 9043 (FIGS. 41 and 42) for detecting a pressing operation on the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is located at a position corresponding to the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B inside the member forming the upper plate 9090. Reference) may be provided. The button switch unit 9043 includes a transmission type photosensor corresponding to the volume adjustment button 9042A and a transmission type photosensor corresponding to the volume adjustment button 9042B, and which volume adjustment button is pressed by these transmission type photosensors. What is necessary is just to be able to detect whether it was operated.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a stick controller 9031A that can be tilted in the front-rear and left-right directions, a push button 9031B that can be pressed downward, and a volume adjustment button 9042A that can be pressed backward. 9042B is provided so that the player can operate. The stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operated by the player to perform an operation process corresponding to the operation. Is called. For example, when the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, single stroke operation, continuous stroke operation, long press operation, etc.), the display image of the effect display device 905 changes at a timing according to the operation. Sound effects. Further, when the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operated in a predetermined operation mode (for example, a single stroke operation, a continuous stroke operation, a long press operation, etc.), an image ( For example, a volume level indicator (see FIG. 41B) or the like changes, or an adjustment sound effect is output at a volume corresponding to the level adjusted from the speakers 908L and 908R.

  Of these stick controller 9031A, push button 9031B, and volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B have an operation process that does not correspond to the long press operation when a long press operation is performed. Done. For example, when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time, the display image of the effect display device 905 is changed or a sound effect is output in a mode when operated in a continuous hitting mode. In addition, when the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operated for a long time, the volume levels of the speakers 908L and 908R change in the manner when operated in a continuous manner. On the other hand, even if the stick controller 9031A is operated for a long time, the display image of the effect display device 905 does not change or the sound effect is not output in the mode when operated in the continuous hit mode.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are rendered in the same manner as when the operation portion is operated in a continuous manner when the operation portion is operated for a long time. The operation unit has an “automatic continuous hitting function” for changing the volume level, and the stick controller 9031A is an operating unit without an “automatic continuous hitting function”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B are equipped with an “automatic continuous hitting function” that allows the player to recognize that they are operation units having an “automatic continuous hitting function”. Display units 90200A and 90200B on which the characters “are displayed are provided in the vicinity of each operation unit.

  Various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and an LED control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 42 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 includes a relay board 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface. Various substrates such as a substrate are arranged.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is a sub-side control board mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function that allows an output signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position to be input, an effect control board 9012, etc. Are provided with a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to the outside, and the like. In addition, the main board 9011 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and performs the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 9020 or the like. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 9011 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 90100, and a game control microcomputer 90100. A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and produces an effect display device 905 and speakers 908L and 908R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the presentation operation by the production electrical parts such as the production LED 909 are mounted. The sound control board 9013 is equipped with a processing circuit for executing sound signal processing for outputting sound from the speakers 908L and 908R based on commands and control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) from the effect control board 9012, and the like. Has been. The LED control board 9014 is mounted with an LED driver circuit that performs on / off driving of the effect LED 909 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the main board 9011 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The main board 9011 includes a first special symbol display 904A, a second special symbol display 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and an ordinary figure hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 toward the effect control board 9012 is relayed by the relay board 9015. The control command transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012 via the relay board 9015 is an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal, for example. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 43 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number and may be a value corresponding to the instruction content by the effect control command.

  A game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main board 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM 90101 (Read Only Memory 90101) for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM 90102 (Random Access Memory 90102) that provides an area, a CPU 90103 (Central Processing Unit 90103) that performs a control operation by executing a game control program, and update of numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 90103 It comprises a random number circuit 90104 for performing and an I / O 90105 (Input / Outputport 90105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 9011, a random number value MR1 ′ for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 ′ for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 ′ for determining a variation pattern, a random value MR4 ′ for determining a normal figure display result, etc. Numeric data of various random values is controlled to be countable.

  FIG. 44 shows the variation pattern of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns as shown in FIG. 44 are prepared in advance. Specifically, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “out of”, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is “big hit”.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 42 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and setting tables prepared in advance for the CPU 90103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 90101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 90103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 9011 and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 45 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. The display result determination table sets the variation display result as “big hit” to the big win game state before the fixed special symbols are derived and displayed in the special special symbol game of the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to control based on random number value MR1 '. Also, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short time state (low probability state), or a probability variation state (high probability state), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 ′ is “big hit” ”And“ out of ”special map display results.

  In the ROM 90101, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot type determination table referred to for determining one of a plurality of jackpot types based on the random value MR2 ′, the random value MR3 A variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern as one of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 44 based on 'is also stored. The variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 90101 is a variation pattern determination table for big hits that is used when “big hit” is determined in advance, and a variation pattern determination table that is determined to be “out”. A deviation pattern determination table to be used is prepared in advance.

  The RAM 90102 included in the game control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 42 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power supply from a predetermined power supply board. The RAM 90102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure hold storage unit, a second special figure hold storage unit, a general figure hold storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. A setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 42, an effect control board 9012 provides an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operations according to a program, an ROM 90121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 90120. The RAM 90122, the display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 905, and the effect control CPU 90120 update numerical data indicating random numbers independently of each other. A random number circuit 90124 and an I / O 90125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 9012, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 90121, various processes for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts are executed. Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, as with the main board 9011, for example, various random values (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining execution or non-execution of various effects, types of effects, and the like are set. Has been. In addition to the program for effect control, the ROM 90121 stores various table data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, execution of various effects, non-execution, and the type of effect. Table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, pattern data constituting an effect control pattern corresponding to each variation pattern, and the like are stored. In addition, in the RAM 90122, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 of this embodiment will be described. In the main board 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 90103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started.

  CPU90103 which performed such game control main processing will perform the game control timer interruption process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, if the interruption request signal from CTC is received and an interruption request | requirement is received. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 47 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine the state of detection signals input from various switches via the switch circuit 90110 (S9011). ). Subsequently, predetermined main-side error processing is executed (S9012). Thereafter, predetermined information output processing is executed (S9013). Next, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 ′ to MR4 ′ by software is executed (S9014). Thereafter, the special symbol process shown in FIG. 48 is executed (S9015). Subsequent to the special symbol process, the normal symbol display 9020 controls the display operation of the normal symbol to display the variation of the normal symbol and to set the tilting operation of the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 906B. It is executed (S9016). After that, by executing a command control process, a control command is transmitted (output) from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 (S9017).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, first, a start winning determination process is executed (S9021). Then, according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit, one of the processes of S9022 to S9029 is selected and executed.

  In the start winning process of S9021, it is determined whether or not there has been a first start prize or a second start prize by the first start port switch 9022A or the second start port switch 9022B. , MR2 ′, MR3 ′ are extracted and stored at the top of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit. In the special symbol normal process of S9022, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved data. Further, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 ′, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result is “big hit” before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a missing symbol) is set corresponding to the variation display result. In the special symbol normal process, if the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is “0”, the special symbol normal process is terminated after a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 905 is effected from the main board 9011. It is determined whether or not transmission to the control board 9012 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  In the variation pattern setting process of S9023, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR3 ′ based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variation display result is “big hit”. Including processing. The special symbol change process of S9024 is a process for performing setting for changing the special symbol on the first special symbol display 904A and the second special symbol display 904B, and the process after the special symbol starts changing. Includes processing to measure time. The special symbol stop process of S9025 is a process for performing a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) a confirmed special symbol that is a variable symbol display result on the first special symbol display 904A or the second special symbol display 904B. including. The pre-opening process of S9026 is based on the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit”, etc., etc., and the processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state, etc. including. The big hit opening process of S9027 includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state. The processing after the big hit release in S9028 includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round for setting the big winning opening to the open state has reached the maximum value of the number of large winning opening opening. The jackpot end process in S9029 includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described. First, the effect control CPU 90120 starts executing the main process shown in FIG. 49 when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S9051). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S9052). When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt flag is set by timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on) in the main process, the flag is cleared (S9053), and the following process is executed.

  The effect control CPU 90120 first performs command analysis processing for analyzing which command (see FIG. 43) is the command transmitted from the main board 9011 stored in the reception command buffer (S9054). Next, an effect control process is performed (S9055). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 905 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process for updating a counter value for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number is executed (S9056). Next, a volume adjustment process is performed when the player operates the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B in the demonstration performance period and the big hit gaming state (S9057). In the volume adjustment process, control is performed to set the volume of the sound output from the speakers 908L and 908R by operating the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, and then the process proceeds to S9052.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S9055) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90120 first displays the hold memory display in the first hold memory display area 905D and the second hold memory display area 905U of the effect display device 905 according to the stored contents of the hold memory buffer. A pending display update process for updating the display is executed (S9072). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 performs any one of S9073 to S9079 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  In the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S9073), it is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 90100. In the effect symbol variation start process (S9074), control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. In addition, the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect is executed, and if it is executed, processing for determining the effect pattern is executed. In the effect symbol variation processing (S9075), the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern is controlled, and the end of the variation time is monitored. In addition, when the execution of the notice effect is determined in the effect symbol variation start process of S9074, the notice effect is executed at an appropriate timing. In the effect symbol variation stop process (S9076), based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the control of the effect symbol variation is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. I do. In the big hit display process (S9077), after the end of the variation time, the effect display device 905 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. In the big hit game processing (S9078), control during the big hit game is performed. In the big hit end effect process (S9079), the effect display device 905 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (B), the CPU 90120 for effect control has the above-mentioned “automatic repetitive hitting” for the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B according to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. Processing to enable or disable the function. Specifically, during the period in which the symbol variation display is performed and the period from when the variation display is stopped until the demonstration effect is started (for example, ta1 to ta2), the automatic repeat function of the push button 9031B is enabled. While the automatic adjustment function of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B and the stick controller 9031A is disabled, the automatic adjustment function of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is enabled in the demonstration performance period and the big hit game period (for example, ta2 to ta3). Then, the automatic continuous hitting function of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A is invalidated.

  In other words, in the notice effect that is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, only the push button 9031B is enabled for the automatic continuous hitting function, and during the symbol variation display such as the demonstration performance period and the big hit game period, Only the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B enable the automatic continuous hitting function. In addition, regarding the stick controller 9031A, the automatic continuous hitting function is always disabled regardless of the symbol variation display.

  As described above, one of the operation units (for example, the stick controller 9031A) of the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B does not become effective (the automatic continuous hitting function is installed). Absent). Also, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, which are the two operation units for which the automatic continuous hitting function is effective, do not enable the automatic continuous hitting function at the same time. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience due to execution of.

  In this embodiment, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are automatically struck depending on whether the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is in the display of fluctuation of the symbol, during execution of the demonstration effect, or in the big hit gaming state. The function is switched between enabled and disabled, but is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the above, the function may be switched according to the rendering state such as during the execution of reach rendering or during execution of pseudo-continuous extension. Alternatively, switching may be performed according to a gaming state such as a probability variation state, a non-probability variation state, a high base state, and a low base state.

  Next, an operation process performed by the effect control CPU 90120 when the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is operated will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 receives a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 9035A of the stick controller 9031A or the push sensor 9035B of the push button 9031B in the operation valid period in which the operation of the stick controller 9031A or push button 9031B is effective. The effect is executed as an operation process corresponding to the operation.

  For example, when the stick controller 9031A is operated once (single stroke operation), an effect of changing an image (for example, an effect image) displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed at a timing corresponding to the operation. Further, when the stick controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed at a timing corresponding to each operation. In addition, when the stick controller 9031A is pressed (long press) for a predetermined period, an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is performed over the period of the pressing operation.

  When the push button 9031B is operated once (single stroke operation), an effect of changing an image (for example, an effect image) displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed at a timing corresponding to the operation. Further, when the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed at a timing corresponding to each operation. In addition, when the push button 9031B is pressed for a predetermined period (long press), an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is performed over the period of the pressing operation.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 90120 executes the repeated hitting operation promotion effect that prompts the repeated hitting operation in the above-described advance notice effect executed during the automatic repeated hitting effective period, the push button 9031B is determined to be a long press determination period (for example, about 1 second). When a press operation (long press operation) is performed over a wide range, an effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed in the same manner as when the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation). . That is, as a non-corresponding operation process that does not correspond to the operation mode (for example, long press operation) in which the push button 9031B is actually operated, the same as when the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hit operation). An effect of changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed.

  Next, an operation process performed by the effect control CPU 90120 when the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operated will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 executes an operation process corresponding to the operation based on the reception of the detection signal from the button switch unit 9043 in the operation effective period in which the operation of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is effective.

  For example, when one of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is operated once (single stroke operation), an image (for example, a volume level indicator (FIG. 41 (FIG. 41) shown in FIG. 41) is displayed at a timing corresponding to the operation. B) (refer to B)) or the like, or an operation process of outputting a predetermined sound from the speakers 908L and 908R at a volume corresponding to the level is executed. Further, when any one of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is operated continuously (multiple hitting operations), an image displayed on the effect display device 905 is changed at a timing corresponding to each operation, or a speaker An operation process of outputting a predetermined sound at a volume corresponding to the level from 908L and 908R is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 presses any of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B during the long press determination period (for example, about 1 second) during the demonstration effect or the big hit effect executed during the automatic continuous hitting effective period. When a long press operation is performed, the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is changed in the same manner as when one of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous operation), An operation process of continuously outputting a predetermined sound at a volume corresponding to the level from the speakers 908L and 908R is executed. In other words, as a non-corresponding operation process that does not correspond to an operation mode (for example, long press operation) in which any of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is actually operated, any one of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is continuously plural times. An operation process for changing the image displayed on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the operation (continuous hitting operation) is performed, or for continuously outputting a predetermined sound from the speakers 908L and 908R at a volume corresponding to the level. Execute the (Auto repeat function).

  Here, the automatic continuous hitting function is described. The automatic continuous hitting function means that when the push button 9031B or the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B for which the automatic continuous hitting function is valid is operated for a long time, the effect control CPU 90120 pushes the push button 9031B or the volume adjustment. The function is to execute the same effect as when the buttons 9042A and 9042B are repeatedly hit.

  In the notice effect performed during the period in which the effect control CPU 90120 enables the automatic repeat function of the push button 9031B (for example, the period in which the symbol variation display is executed), the automatic repeat effect of the push button 9031B is executed. An example of the production mode will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing an example of a production mode of auto-striking effects. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram of an automatic repeated hit determination table. 54 (A) and 54 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing repeated hitting operation promotion effects, and (C), (D), and (E) are automatic repeated hit effects.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the CPU 90120 for effect control has an effect display device 905 that promotes repeated operation of the push button 9031B at a predetermined timing in the notice effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 54A). The image of the character A and the push button 9031B is displayed on the screen, and the display of a character such as “let the player hit the button repeatedly to hit the enemy character with a hit!” Is started (tb1). Next, the operation of the push button 9031B is validated for a predetermined period from the time (tb2) when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the continuous hitting operation promotion effect, and the start of the operation effective period is notified to the player in a recognizable manner (for example, As shown in FIG. 54B, an image of the push button 9031B and an indicator indicating the operation valid period is displayed on the effect display device 905, and the characters “Start!” Are displayed.

  When the push sensor 9035B is turned on during the operation valid period (tb2 to tb5) in which the operation of the push button 9031B is effective, and the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the effect display device 905. The automatic continuous striking effect is displayed to display an image in which the character A displayed in FIG. 5 is punched (see FIGS. 54C and 54D). On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, when a single stroke operation of the push button 9031B or a continuous stroke operation in which the single stroke operation is repeated is performed, a continuous stroke effect that displays only a punch image is executed every time the push sensor 9035B is turned on ( (See FIG. 56C).

  Here, if it is determined that the push sensor 9035B is on for a long press determination period (tb3 to tb4, for example, 1 second), that is, the push button 9031B is operated to be pressed for 1 second, which is the long press determination period. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the character A displayed on the effect display device 905 every first period (for example, L1 = about 0.8 seconds), as in the case where the push button 9031B is operated repeatedly. A first auto-striking effect for displaying an image for punching is displayed (see FIG. 54C). This first auto-striking effect is continuously executed while the push sensor 9035B is on during the operation effective period.

  If the push sensor 9035B changes to the OFF state after the long press determination period of 1 second has elapsed after the push sensor 9035B changes to the ON state, the effect control CPU 90120 operates the push button 9031B with a single stroke. As an example, an effect of displaying an image in which the character A displayed on the effect display device 905 is punched is executed, and the first auto-striking effect is not executed (see FIG. 55A). In addition, when it is determined that the push sensor 9035B has changed to the off state after executing the first automatic repeated striking effect within the operation effective period, has changed to the on state again, and has continued for a long press determination period (for example, 1 second). Then, the first auto-striking effect is executed.

  As described above, when the repeated hitting operation promotion effect is executed, when the push sensor 9035B is repeatedly operated, the repeated display effect is displayed on the effect display device 905 at the timing corresponding to each operation. However, when the push sensor 9035B is operated for a long time, a first automatic repeated effect is displayed in which an image in which the character A is punched is displayed on the effect display device 905 for each first period.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an image in which the character A punches out on the effect display device 905 for each first period (for example, L1 = about 0.8 seconds) as an automatic repeated striking effect. It is possible to execute a one-automatic repeated striking effect and a second automatic repeated striking effect in which an image in which the character A is punched is displayed on the effect display device 905 every second period (for example, L2 = about 0.5 seconds) (FIG. 54 (D)). That is, the speed of continuous hitting executed as the automatic continuous hitting effect (interval for displaying the image of punching out) is different between the first automatic continuous hitting effect and the second automatic continuous hitting effect.

  When the effect control CPU 90120 decides to execute the repeated hit effect in the notice effect, the first automatic repeat effect and the second automatic hit effect are determined based on the type of the change pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the change. Which one of the auto-striking effects is executed and the number of punch hits are determined.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command, the production control CPU 90120 determines to execute the first automatic repeated strike production at a rate of 20%. Then, the execution of the second automatic repeated effect is determined at a rate of 80%. When the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a super-reaching variation pattern designation command, execution of the first automatic repeated striking effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and second automatic repeated stroke at a rate of 30%. Decide to execute the production. When the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a normal reach deviation variation pattern designation command, the execution of the first automatic repeated stroke effect is determined at a rate of 80%, and the second automatic repeated stroke effect at a rate of 20%. Determine the execution.

  As described above, when the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a jackpot variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second auto at a higher rate than when the deviation variation pattern designation command is received. The execution of the repeated hitting effect is determined, and the determined automatic repeated hitting effect is executed. Therefore, the possibility of a big hit can be suggested by the mode of the auto-striking effect.

  In addition, when the variable display result becomes the big hit display result, the second automatic continuous hit effect is determined at a higher rate than the case where the fluctuation display result becomes the missed display result. Expectation can be improved. Further, even if the variable display result is a disappointing display result, the second automatic repeated striking effect is executed in order to determine the second automatic repeated striking effect at a higher rate in the case of super reach than in the case of normal reach. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for development to super reach. In addition, even when the variable display result is the big hit display result, the first auto-hit effect may be determined, so that the expectation for the big hit can be maintained even when the first auto-hit effect is executed. When the variable display result is the jackpot display result, the second auto-spanning effect is executed at a rate of 100%, and when the display result is the off-line display result, the first auto-striking effect is executed at a rate of 100%. Also good.

  Moreover, in the automatic repeated hitting effect, when the fluctuation display result becomes the jackpot display result, the punch that the character A has fed out at a higher rate hits the enemy character (not shown) than in the case of the loss display result. At the end of the auto-strike effect, the number of hits hit by an enemy character (not shown) among the punches that have been delivered is displayed, and the degree of expectation of the big hit is suggested according to the number of hits (see FIG. 54E).

  Next, an example of an effect mode in the case where the push button 9031B is repeatedly operated in the continuous impact effect of the push button 9031B will be described based on FIG. 55 and FIG. FIG. 55A is a timing chart showing an example of an effect mode of continuous hitting, and FIG. 55B is a timing chart showing an effect mode of high-speed 10 consecutive hits. 56 (A) and 56 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing repeated hitting operation promotion effects, and (C), (D), and (E) are repeated hitting effects.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the effect control CPU 90120 produces a repetitive hitting operation promotion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (A)) that promotes the repetitive operation of the push button 9031B at a predetermined timing in the notice effect. The image of the character A and the push button 9031B is displayed on the display device 905, and a character such as “let the button be hit repeatedly and let the enemy character hit the punch!” Is started (tc1). Next, the operation of the push button 9031B is validated for a predetermined period from the time (tc2) when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the continuous hitting operation promotion effect, and the start of the operation effective period is notified to the player in a recognizable manner (for example, As shown in FIG. 56 (B), the push button 9031B and an image of an indicator indicating the operation validity period are displayed on the effect display device 905, and the characters “Start!” Are displayed.

  When the push sensor 9035B is turned on during the operation valid period (tc2 to tc5) in which the operation of the push button 9031B is effective and the operation of the push button 9031B is detected, the effect control CPU 90120 punches the effect display device 905. Only the image (without character A) is displayed (see FIG. 56C). That is, when the push button 9031B is not operated for a long time and a single stroke operation or a continuous stroke operation in which the single stroke operation is repeated is performed, an effect of displaying a punch image each time the push sensor 9035B is turned on is performed. Then, at the end of the continuous hit effect, the same character A as the character A that appears at the end of the automatic hit effect appears. In addition, the number of hits hit by enemy characters (not shown) among the punches that have been paid out is displayed, and the degree of expectation of jackpot is suggested according to the number of hits (see FIG. 56D).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the operation effective period (tc2 to tc7), the push sensor 9035B is a second period (interval for displaying an image of punching out with the second automatic repeated effect. For example, if the state that changes to the ON state every third period (for example, L3 = less than about 0.5 seconds) shorter than L2 = about 0.5 seconds) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), The control CPU 90120 causes a character B different from the character A that appears when the high-speed ten consecutive hits are not achieved at the end of the continuous hit effect, assuming that the high-speed ten consecutive hits have been achieved. Thus, since the effect according to the speed of the player's continuous hitting operation is executed, the gaming interest can be improved.

  Further, when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time in the repeated hitting effect, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an automatic repeated hitting effect in which an image in which the character punches is displayed on the effect display device 905. In the repeated hitting effect, the push button 9031B is displayed. When the continuous hitting operation is performed, a continuous hitting effect is displayed in which only the image for punching is displayed without displaying the character on the effect display device 905. In this way, by displaying different images for the auto-striking effect and the continuous-striking effect, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time in the repetitive strike effect, the automatic repetitive strike effect is executed at a rate of 100%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time in the repeated hitting effect, the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed at a different rate from the case where the repeated hitting operation is performed. For example, a continuous hit effect may be executed when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time, or an automatic repeated effect may be executed when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 exemplifies the form in which the character B appears at the end of the repeated hitting effect when it is determined that the high-speed ten consecutive hits are achieved when the repeated hitting effect is executed. Instead, the character B may appear when it is determined that high-speed ten consecutive hits have been achieved.

  Moreover, although the form which performs the effect which makes the character B appear as an effect corresponding to this continuous hit operation when the continuous hit operation is performed at a speed faster than the speed of the continuous hit executed in the second automatic continuous hit effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The character B may appear as an effect corresponding to the continuous hit operation when the continuous hit operation is performed at a speed higher than the speed of the continuous hit executed in the first automatic repeated hit effect. A character C different from B may be displayed. Moreover, it is not limited to the effect which displays a character.

  In this embodiment, the push sensor 9035B has a third period (for example, shorter than the second period (for example, L2 = about 0.5 seconds)) that is an interval for displaying an image in which punching is performed in the second automatic repeated striking effect. , L3 = less than about 0.5 seconds), the state in which the character B appears when the state that changes to the ON state every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) continues is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination as to whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed at a speed faster than the speed of the continuous hitting performed in the second automatic hitting effect may be made, for example, based on an average speed during the continuous hitting operation period, The determination may be made based on the continuous hitting speed in a specific period, and various changes can be made.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90120 exemplifies a form in which an automatic repeated hitting effect is executed when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time after the repeated hitting operation promoting effect is performed. After the production, the auto button is pressed when the push button 9031B is operated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) until a predetermined determination period (for example, about 2 seconds) elapses after the operation effective period is started. You may make it perform a continuous striking effect. In this case, when the single operation of the push button 9031B is performed three times that is the predetermined number of times within 2 seconds that is the predetermined determination period, an interval for displaying an image of punching out with the second automatic repeated effect When a single stroke operation is performed every third period (for example, L3 = less than approximately 0.5 seconds) shorter than the second period (for example, L2 = approximately 0.5 seconds), that is, when a continuous stroke operation is performed at high speed Instead of executing the automatic repeated hitting effect, the repeated hitting effect according to the speed of the player's repeated hitting operation may be executed.

  Next, in the case of executing the continuous hitting effect of the push button 9031B, for the effect control when the push button 9031B having the automatic continuous hitting function is operated for a long time and at the same time the stick controller 9031A having no automatic continuous hitting function is operated. Processing contents performed by the CPU 90120 will be described. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing an example of processing contents when the push button and the stick controller are operated simultaneously.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 90120 starts a continuous hit operation promotion effect that promotes the continuous hit operation of the push button 9031B at a predetermined timing in the notice effect (td1). Therefore, the operation of the push button 9031B is validated for a predetermined period. In this operation valid period, the push sensor 9035B and the controller sensor unit 9035A receive the detection signal of the push sensor 9035B almost immediately or immediately after receiving the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 9035A, and the detection signal of the push sensor 9035B When it is continuously received during the long press determination period, the operation of the stick controller 9031A is invalidated.

  That is, the process based on the reception of the detection signal of the push sensor 9035B is executed without executing the process based on the reception of the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 9035A. Therefore, when the long press determination period has elapsed with the push sensor 9035B being in the ON state, the automatic continuous striking effect is executed. By doing in this way, even if the player mistakenly operates not only the push button 9031B but also the stick controller 9031A, an auto-striking effect can be executed, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to this embodiment, for example, when the stick controller 9031A is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hitting operation), the effect control CPU 90120 performs each operation. When the stick controller 9031A is pressed for a predetermined period (long press operation) for a predetermined period of time, an effect that changes the image displayed on the effect display device 905 is executed at a corresponding timing. A long press effect that changes the image displayed on the display device 905 is executed. Further, when the push button 9031B is continuously operated a plurality of times (continuous hit operation), the push button 9031B executes a continuous hit effect that changes the image displayed on the effect display device 905 at a timing corresponding to each operation. When 9031B is pressed (long press operation) for a predetermined period, the effect control CPU 90120 displays the effect on the effect display device 905 in the same manner as when the push button 9031B is operated continuously (multi-stroke operation). Auto repetitive effects that change the image being played are executed.

  As described above, among the operation units including the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, the stick controller 9031A in which only the continuous hit effect and the long press effect corresponding to the operation are executed is included. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of inconvenience due to execution of an unintended auto-striking effect or the like.

  In addition, it is possible to deal with a player who is not good at continuous hitting operations by executing the automatic hitting effect as non-corresponding operation processing not corresponding to the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, variable display is performed, and when a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit display result) is derived and displayed as a display result, it can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the variation pattern designation command received from the game control microcomputer 90100 is a big hit variation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 has a higher rate than the case where the deviation variation pattern designation command is received. 2 The execution of the auto-spanning effect is determined, and the determined auto-striking effect is executed. In the first auto-striking effect, an image in which the character A is punched is displayed every first period (for example, L1 = about 0.8 seconds). Is displayed on the effect display device 905, and in the second auto-hit effect, character A repeatedly punches. The to image the second period (e.g., L2 = about 0.5 seconds) displayed in the effect display device 905 for each. By doing in this way, since it will be suggested whether it is easy to be in a big hit state by the speed of continuous hitting, a game entertainment interest can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 has a second period (for example, L2 = about 0. 2) that is an interval in which the push sensor 9035B displays an image of punching in the second auto-striking effect in the operation effective period (tc2 to tc7). When the state that changes to the ON state every third period (for example, L3 = less than about 0.5 seconds) shorter than 5 seconds) continues for a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the effect control CPU 90120 performs high speed 10 Assuming that continuous hitting is achieved, a character B different from the character A that appears when high-speed ten consecutive hits are not achieved is caused to appear at the end of the continuous hitting effect. By doing in this way, the effect according to the speed of the player's continuous hitting operation is executed, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

  Further, regarding the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A, 9042B, the display unit 90200A, on which characters “automatic continuous hitting function installed” that allows the player to recognize that the operation unit has “automatic continuous hitting function” are displayed. Since the 90200B is provided in the vicinity of each operation unit, the player can recognize which of the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B has the automatic continuous hitting function. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience due to misidentification can be further prevented.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically pushes the push button 9031B during the period during which the symbol display is changed and the period from when the change display is stopped until the demonstration effect is started (for example, ta1 to ta2). While the function is enabled and the automatic continuous hitting function of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B and the stick controller 9031A is disabled, the automatic adjustment of the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is performed during the demonstration performance period and the big hit game period (for example, ta2 to ta3). Since the continuous hitting function can be enabled and the automatic continuous hitting function of the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A can be disabled, the situation in which the automatic continuous hitting effect and operation processing not corresponding to the long press operation mode is executed according to the gaming state. Can be changed.

  Further, when the push button 9031B is operated for a long time in the repeated hitting effect, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an automatic repeated hitting effect in which an image in which the character punches is displayed on the effect display device 905. In the repeated hitting effect, the push button 9031B is displayed. When the repeated hitting operation is performed, the character display is not displayed on the effect display device 905, and the repeated hitting effect that displays only the image of the punching is executed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90120 receives the detection signal of the push sensor 9035B almost immediately after the push sensor 9035B and the controller sensor unit 9035A receive the detection signal of the controller sensor unit 9035A in the operation effective period, and When the detection signal of the push sensor 9035B is continuously received in the long press determination period, the operation of the stick controller 9031A is invalidated, so that the player can operate not only the push sensor 9035B but also the stick controller 9031A by mistake. Thus, the automatic repeated hitting effect is executed, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Although the embodiments have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there may be changes and additions within a range not departing from the gist.

  Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 shows, as a modification, (A) a state in which the variable display is stopped, (B) a state in which the demonstration effect is started, (C) a state in which the menu display is selected in the demonstration effect, (D) These are explanatory drawings showing a display screen in a state in which the description of the automatic continuous hitting function is selected on the menu display screen.

  In the above-described embodiment, the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are displayed with the characters “auto-tapping function installed” on which the player can recognize that the operation unit has “auto-tapping function”. By providing 90200A and 90200B in the vicinity of each operation unit, the player can recognize which of the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B has the automatic continuous hitting function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can recognize by the effect display device 905 that the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operation units having an automatic continuous hitting function. May be displayed.

  For example, after the symbol fluctuation display is stopped (see FIG. 58A), the menu display is selected during the execution of the demonstration screen display (see FIG. 58B) (see FIG. 58C), and the menu display is displayed. When the description of the automatic continuous hitting function is selected (see FIG. 58D), the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B have the automatic continuous hitting function corresponding to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901. You may make it display the table image which shows an effective period. Further, instead of the display portions 90200A, 90200B, and the like, a sticker or the like on which the table shown in FIG. 58D is printed may be attached to a position such as the upper plate 9090 that is visible to the player.

  Further, not only whether the automatic continuous hitting function is valid or invalid, but also the detailed contents of the automatic continuous hitting effect such as the continuous hitting speed, the continuous hitting period, and the number of consecutive hits in the automatic continuous hitting effect may be displayed in a recognizable manner.

  In the screen shown in FIG. 58 (D), when the continuous hit effect is executed during the effective period of the automatic continuous hit function, even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the automatic continuous hit effect is displayed when the effective operation period starts. You may enable it to enable / disable the "automatic automatic continuous hitting function" performed automatically.

  Therefore, in the screen shown in FIG. 58 (D), when the “automatic automatic hitting function” is enabled, the push button 9031B is not operated when the continuous hitting effect is executed during the effective period of the automatic continuous hitting function. Since the automatic repeated striking effect is automatically executed when the operation valid period starts, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Further, in this modified example, when the automatic automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, it is assumed that a predetermined automatic processing condition is satisfied, and even if the push button 9031B is not operated, the automatic continuous hitting effect is started when the operation effective period is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not limited to this, and when a valid operation period is started in a single stroke production, the single stroke production is automatically performed without performing a single stroke operation. It may be possible to enable / disable an automatic operation function for automatically executing a long press effect without performing a long press operation when an operation effective period is started in the press effect. Further, the predetermined automatic processing condition may be satisfied not only by enabling the automatic automatic continuous hitting function to be valid, but also by, for example, a game time, a variable display count, a big hit count, and a mobile link.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which applied the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume control buttons 9042A and 9042B as a plurality of operation parts was illustrated, it is not limited to this, Operation parts other than these (For example, a jog dial operation unit, a cross key operation unit, a lever operation unit, etc.) may be applied. Also, the stick controller 9031A is tilted back and forth and left and right, the push button 9031B is pressed downward, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are operating parts that are pressed backward. The direction may be arbitrary, and may be an operation such as pulling or turning other than tilting and pressing.

  In the above embodiment, the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, only the stick controller 9031A is exemplified as not having the automatic continuous hitting function. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. The push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B may be an operation unit that does not have the automatic continuous hitting function.

  In the above-described embodiment, only the stick controller 9031A, which is one of the three operation units of the stick controller 9031A, the push button 9031B, and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B, is an operation unit that does not have the automatic continuous hitting function. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and has at least two or more operation units, and the operation of the first operation mode or the operation mode of the second operation mode is different from the first operation mode in the first operation unit. When there is an operation, corresponding operation processing corresponding to each operation mode is executed, and when there is an operation of the third operation mode in the second operation unit, corresponding operation processing corresponding to the third operation mode is performed. On the other hand, when there is an operation in the fourth operation mode that is different from the third operation mode, the non-correspondence does not correspond to the fourth operation mode As long as it executes the work process, the first operation unit and a second operating portion of the stick controller 9031A, push buttons 9031B and the volume adjustment button 9042A, may be any of the 9042B.

  Moreover, in the said Example, the 1st operation mode and the 3rd operation mode are the same operation modes (for example, continuous operation), and the 2nd operation mode and the 4th operation mode are the same operation modes (for example, long Push operation). In addition, the first operation mode and the fourth operation mode are the same operation mode (for example, long press operation), and the second operation mode and the third operation mode are the same operation mode (for example, continuous hit operation). May be.

  In this embodiment, as for the stick controller 9031A, an example in which the automatic continuous hitting function is always disabled regardless of the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to this, but the pachinko gaming machine 901 is not limited to this. In the case where only the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B are provided, the automatic repeat function of the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B is switched between valid and invalid. It is only necessary to prevent the continuous hitting function from being effective.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which applied the single hit operation, the continuous hit operation, and the long press operation was illustrated as an example of an operation mode, it is not limited to this, Operation modes other than the above (for example, 2 times) A pushing or rotating operation) may be applied.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the operation valid period in which the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B is effective, the effect control CPU 90120 performs an operation process corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B. Although the form which changes the image displayed on the effect display apparatus 905 was illustrated as an effect to perform, it is not limited to this, For example, a sound effect etc. are output from speakers 908L and 908R other than the above, for example In addition, there are effects such as operating a movable body (not shown) provided so as to be operable, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and the like. In addition, the operation processing in response to the operation of the stick controller 9031A and the push button 9031B by the effect control CPU 90120 includes processes other than the effects such as adjustment processing of volume, light amount, emission color, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the automatic continuous hitting effect is executed by performing a long press operation different from the continuous hitting operation at the time of executing the continuous hitting effect is illustrated. An auto-racking effect may be executed by performing an operation other than the long press operation (for example, a predetermined number of single-stroke operations) at the time of execution. In addition, the auto long press effect may be executed by performing an operation other than the long press operation (for example, a predetermined number of single-stroke operations) at the time of executing the long press effect.

  Moreover, in the said Example, although the form which set the operation aspect required in order to perform an automatic repeated striking effect as a long press operation in this way was illustrated, it is not limited to this, An automatic repeated striking effect is performed. An operation mode necessary for this purpose may be set by either a player or a salesperson such as a shop clerk. When the player can set the operation, the operation according to the preference can be realized. On the other hand, when the salesperson such as a game shop clerk can set the operation, the operation mode is adjusted in consideration of the usage frequency of the automatic continuous hitting function. In this way, asset value can be maintained.

  Furthermore, the player may be able to set according to specific conditions (for example, the game time, the number of times of variable display, the number of jackpots, the mobile link, etc.). Since the automatic continuous hitting function to be reduced becomes effective when a specific condition is satisfied, the game can be promoted.

  In the above embodiment, the operation unit equipped with the automatic continuous hitting function is determined in advance as the push button 9031B and the volume adjustment buttons 9042A and 9042B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to set any one of the business operators.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the execution period of the automatic continuous striking effect is within the preset operation effective period, but is not limited to this, and is executed by, for example, a player playing a game In an effect to be performed, when a value greater than a predetermined value (for example, an effect point or the like) is acquired, an execution period or the number of executable times of an auto-strike effect may be given. In this way, as the game time increases, the period and the number of times that the player can use the automatic continuous hitting function increase, so that the game can be promoted.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine 901 is illustrated as an example of a gaming machine, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be circulated inside the gaming machine. The number of balls lent out in response to a loan request from a player and the number of prize balls given in response to a prize is added, while the number of game balls used in a game is subtracted and stored. This is also applicable to so-called enclosed game machines. In these enclosed game machines, not the game ball but points and points are given to the player, so these points and points assigned correspond to the game value.

  In the embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving a variation display result to a variation display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, and a prize is awarded according to the variation display result derived to the variation display device. This can also be applied to a slot machine that can generate

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 5 ... Image display apparatus 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 8L, 8R ... Speaker 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Microcomputer 120 for game control ... CPU for production control
123 ... Display control unit VL ... Volume state display image 901 ... Pachinko machine 904A ... First special symbol display 904B ... Second special symbol display 905 ... Effect display device 9011 ... Main substrate 9012 ... Effect control substrate 9031A ... Stick controller 9031B ... Push buttons 9042A, 9042B ... Volume adjustment button 90100 ... Game control microcomputer 90120 ... Production control CPU
90200A, 90200B ... Display unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine for playing games,
A plurality of operation units that can be operated by the player;
An operation process execution means capable of executing an operation process corresponding to the operation of the operation unit;
A music playback means capable of playing back music during a specific period,
The operation unit includes a first operation unit and a second operation unit,
The operation processing execution means includes
When there is an operation in the first operation mode or an operation in the second operation mode that is different from the first operation mode in the first operation unit, a corresponding operation process corresponding to each operation mode is executed.
When there is an operation in the third operation mode in the second operation unit, a corresponding operation process corresponding to the third operation mode is executed, while a fourth operation mode is different from the third operation mode. When there is an operation, an unsupported operation process that does not correspond to the fourth operation mode is executed,
The music played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music,
The music playback means plays back a specific part that is a part of the selected music at the time of music selection and is different from the head of the music,
A gaming machine characterized by that.